Инструкция по эксплуатации вольво хс60 2019

Как перевести мили в километры?

Где я могу узнать идентификационный номер транспортного средства Volvo?

Что такое идентификационный номер транспортного средства (VIN)?

Когда транспортному средству Volvo требуется техническое обслуживание?

Когда следует заменять тормозную жидкость на Volvo?

В чем разница между топливом E10 и E5?

Одна или несколько дверей не открываются изнутри. Что мне делать?

Автомобильный радиоприемник не включается, что делать?

Инструкция Volvo XC60 (2019) доступно в русский?

Страница: 1

VÄLKOMMEN!
В данном руководстве Quick Guide приводится описание некоторых функций, установленных в вашем Volvo. Более полная информация для вла-
дельца доступна в автомобиле, в приложении и на веб-сайте.
ЦЕНТРАЛЬНЫЙ ДИСПЛЕЙ АВТОМОБИЛЯ
Руководство для владельца установлено на центральном дисплее автомо-
биля и открывается на верхней панели.
МОБИЛЬНОЕ ПРИЛОЖЕНИЕ
Руководство для владельца выпускается в виде приложения (Volvo Manual)
для смартфонов и планшетов. Приложение содержит также видео-инструк-
ции с описанием некоторых функций.
САЙТ ПОДДЕРЖКИ VOLVO
На сайте поддержки Volvo Cars (support.volvocars.com) вы найдете руковод-
ства и видео-инструкции, а также дополнительную информацию и справоч-
ный материал о вашем Volvo и для вас, как владельце Volvo.
ПЕЧАТНАЯ ИНФОРМАЦИЯ
Приложение к руководству для владельца в перчаточном ящике содержит
сведения о предохранителях и технические данные, а также краткий обзор
важной и полезной информации. Печатное руководство для владельца и
дополнения к нему можно заказывать отдельно.

Страница: 2

СОДЕРЖАНИЕ
01. ЗНАКОМСТВО С ВАШИМ VOLVO
В этом разделе представлена информация о некоторых системах и услугах Volvo, а также общие
сведения о внешнем облике и интерьере автомобиля и о центральном дисплее.
02. ИНТЕРЬЕР САЛОНА И ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЕ
Здесь вы можете прочитать о различных функциях в салоне например, о настройках сидений и под-
ключении к Интернету.
03. ПАНЕЛИ ЦЕНТРАЛЬНОГО ДИСПЛЕЯ
Здесь вы найдете информацию о различных главных панелях центрального дисплея, с которых вы
можете управлять многими функциями автомобиля.
04. УМНОЕ ВОЖДЕНИЕ
В этом разделе приводится описание различных систем поддержки водителя, установленных в
автомобиле, а также ряд полезных советов, которые помогут вам управлять автомобилем более
экономично.
05. УПРАВЛЕНИЕ ГОЛОСОМ
Здесь представлены команды/фразы, которые используются в системе голосового управления.
06. СПЕЦИАЛЬНЫЕ РУБРИКИ
Тексты под рубриками «Предостережение», «Важно» и «Внимание», которые вы должны прочитать.
Все известные на момент публикации типы опций/аксессуаров отмечены звездочкой: *.

Страница: 3

НАЧАЛО РАБОТЫ
Познакомьтесь с некоторыми функциями, понятиями и полезными
советами, которые помогут вам наиболее эффективно использовать
возможности вашего Volvo.
Volvo ID
Volvo ID – это личный код, обеспечивающий доступ к широкому спек-
тру услуг с помощью только одного имени пользователя и пароля.
Это, например, Volvo On Call*, услуги по использованию карт*, личный
логин на сайте volvocars.com или возможность заказа времени на
обслуживание и ремонт. Вы можете создать Volvo ID на сайте
volvocars.com, в приложении Volvo On Call или непосредственно в
автомобиле.
Sensus
Sensus – это интеллектуальный интерфейс автомобиля, который
предлагает в автомобиле любые решения, связанные с системой раз-
влечений, подключением к Интернету, навигацией* и информацион-
ными услугами. Именно благодаря Sensus вы обмениваетесь инфор-
мацией с автомобилем и окружающим миром.
Volvo On Call*
Volvo On Call обеспечивает прямую связь1 с автомобилем, а также
дополнительную поддержку и помощь в любое время суток. С
помощью приложения Volvo On Call вы можете увидеть, что необхо-
димо, например, заменить лампы или долить омывающую жидкость.
Вы можете заблокировать и разблокировать замки автомобиля, про-
верить уровень топлива и увидеть, где находится ближайшая автоза-
правочная станция. Вы также можете настроить и запустить функцию
подготовки климата, используя функцию климата на стоянке или уда-
ленного запуска2 двигателя. Для этого загрузите в автомобиль прило-
жение Volvo On Call.
В Volvo On Call также входит помощь на дороге и другие услуги под-
держки. Для этого в потолочной консоли установлена кнопка ON
CALL.
Профили водителя
Многие из настроек, выполняемых в автомобиле, можно приспосо-
бить к индивидуальным предпочтениям водителя и затем сохранить в
одном или нескольких профилях водителя. Каждый ключ можно при-
вязать к профилю водителя. Дополнительную информацию о профи-
лях водителя см. в разделе «Верхняя панель» данного руководства
Quick Guide.
1 При условии, что автомобиль и мобильное устройство находятся в зоне покрытия
сотовой связи или подключены к Интернету другим способом.
2 Имеется на некоторых рынках и для некоторых моделей.
01

Страница: 4

ВНЕШНИЕ ЭЛЕМЕНТЫ – ОБЗОР
Проверьте и сохраните новое значение давления в шинах
(ITPMS)* в TPMS приложения Состояние автомобиля на панели
приложений центрального дисплея. При низком давлении в шинах
на дисплее водителя горит, не мигая, символ . При низком
давлении в шинах проверьте и отрегулируйте давление во всех
четырех шинах и нажмите на Сохранить давление, чтобы сохра-
нить в памяти новое значение.
Проверка уровня масла выполняется в приложении Состояние
автомобиля. Здесь вы также можете просмотреть сообщения о
состоянии автомобиля и заказать время на обслуживание и
ремонт*.
Зеркала заднего вида могут автоматически* наклоняться вниз
при включении передачи заднего хода. Когда автомобиль запи-
рается/отпирается дистанционным ключом, зеркала заднего вида
могут автоматически складываться/раскрываться. Эти функции
активируются на верхней панели центрального дисплея в
Настройки My Car Зеркала и комфорт.
Для блокировки/разблокировки автомобиля без ключа*
достаточно иметь дистанционный ключ с собой, например, в кар-
мане, чтобы закрыть или открыть замки автомобиля. Дистанцион-
ный ключ должен находиться на расстоянии прим. 1 метра
(3 футов) от автомобиля.
Возьмитесь за дверную ручку или нажмите на прорезиненную
пластину в двери багажника, чтобы отпереть автомобиль. Чтобы
заблокировать замки автомобиля слегка нажмите на углубление в
одной из дверных ручек. Не дотрагивайтесь одновременно до
обеих нажимных поверхностей.
Панорамная крыша* состоит из открываемого стеклянного люка
с солнцезащитной шторкой, для управления которыми исполь-
зуется регулятор над зеркалом заднего вида, когда в автомобиле
установлено положение зажигания не ниже I. Чтобы открыть в
положение вентиляции, нажмите на регулятор вверх, а чтобы
закрыть – потяните регулятор вниз. Чтобы полностью открыть
панорамную крышу, потяните регулятор назад два раза. Чтобы
закрыть крышу, потяните регулятор вниз два раза.
Дверь багажника с электроприводом* можно открыть с
помощью функции управления дверью багажника движением
ноги*. Для этого медленно махните ногой вперед под левой
частью заднего бампера. Закройте и заприте крышку, используя
кнопку в нижней кромке двери багажника. Вы также можете
закрыть крышку медленным махом ноги. Отпирать дверь багаж-
ника движением ноги можно только, если в автомобиле установ-
лена система блокировки/разблокировки автомобиля без ключа*.
При открытии и закрытии движением ноги дистанционный ключ
должен находиться в пределах прим. 1 метра (3 футов) за автомо-
билем.
Чтобы дверь багажника не ударилась, например, о крышу в
гараже, вы можете запрограммировать максимальное открытие.
Чтобы задать максимально открытое положение крышки,
откройте и установите крышку в нужное положение. Затем
нажмите на и удерживайте не менее 3-х секунд, чтобы
сохранить выбранное положение.
01

Страница: 5

ЗАПИРАНИЕ/ОТПИРАНИЕ АВТОМОБИЛЯ
Дистанционный ключ
При кратком нажатии запираются двери, дверь багажника и
крышка топливного бака, а также включается сигнализация*.
При длительном нажатии одновременно закрываются панорамная
крыша* и все боковые стекла.
При кратком нажатии отпираются двери, дверь багажника и
крышка топливного бака, а также отключается сигнализация*.
При длительном нажатии одновременно открываются все боко-
вые стекла.
При кратком нажатии открывается замок и отключается сигнали-
зация только в двери багажника.
При длительном нажатии открывается или закрывается дверь
багажника с электроприводом*.
Тревожная функция активирует мигающие и звуковой сигналы,
чтобы при необходимости привлечь внимание окружающих. Для
активирования удерживайте кнопку не менее 3-х секунд или
нажмите на кнопку два раза в течение 3-х секунд. Функцию можно
выключить той же кнопкой минимум через 5 секунд после ее
включения. Она также отключается автоматически через 3
минуты.
Индивидуальная блокировка
Индивидуальная блокировка запирает дверь багажника, что очень
удобно, например, при передаче автомобиля на сервис или сотруд-
нику отеля.
– На панели функций центрального дисплея нажмите
Private Locking, чтобы активировать/отключить функ-
цию.
При активировании/отключении раскрывается окно.
При каждом запирании выбирается четырехзначный
код. При первом использовании функции вы должны
выбрать дополнительный защитный код.
Перчаточный ящик запирается* вручную прилагаемым ключом, кото-
рый находится в перчаточным ящике.
01

Страница: 6

ЭЛЕМЕНТЫ ИНТЕРЬЕРА – ОБЗОР
Центральный дисплей используется для управления различ-
ными основными функциями автомобиля, например, мультимедиа,
навигацией*, настройкой климата, системами поддержки водителя
и приложениями автомобиля.
Дисплей водителя показывает информацию о поездке,
например, скорость, обороты двигателя, навигацию* и активные
функции поддержки водителя. В меню приложений вы можете
выбрать информацию, которую следует показывать на дисплее
водителя. Меню открывается кнопками справа на рулевом
колесе. Настройки можно также выполнить в Настройки My
Car Дисплеи на верхней панели центрального дисплея.
Проекционный дисплей* дополняет дисплей водителя и проеци-
рует информацию на ветровое стекло. Дисплей включается на
панели функций центрального дисплея.
Ручка запуска используется для запуска двигателя. Для доступа
к дисплеям без запуска двигателя поверните по часовой стрелке
и отпустите. Для запуска двигателя выжмите и удерживайте
педаль тормоза, поверните ручку запуска по часовой стрелке и
отпустите. Для остановки двигателя поверните ручку запуска по
часовой стрелке.
Режимы вождения* выбираются регулятором на тоннельной кон-
соли. При запуске в автомобиле всегда установлен режим
Comfort. Нажмите и прокрутите регулятор, чтобы на центральном
дисплее выбрать режим Comfort, Eco, Off Road, Dynamic/
Polestar Engineered* или Individual. Нажмите на регулятор, чтобы
подтвердить. В режиме Individual вы можете отрегулировать
режим вождения в соответствии с предпочитаемой динамикой
автомобиля. Для активирования режима Individual откройте
Настройки My Car Индивидуальный режим вождения на
верхней панели центрального дисплея.
Стояночный тормоз активируется, если потянуть вверх ручку
; при этом на дисплее водителя загорается символ. Тормоз
отпускается вручную – нажмите на ручку и одновременно
выжмите педаль тормоза. С помощью функции автоматического
торможения при остановке ( ) водитель может отпустить педаль
тормоза, сохранив тормозной эффект, когда автомобиль,
например, останавливается перед светофором.
Не забывайте, что перед автоматической мойкой автомобиля
необходимо отключить обе функции, как автоматического тормо-
жения при остановке, так и автоматического приложения стоя-
ночного тормоза. Отключение функции автоматического прило-
жения стояночного тормоза выбирается на верхней панели цен-
трального дисплея в Настройки My Car Стояночный
тормоз и подвеска.
Выключатель подушки безопасности пассажира* расположен
в торце приборной панели со стороны пассажира и становится
доступным, когда открыта дверь. Потяните переключатель на
себя и поверните в положение ON/OFF, чтобы активировать/
отключить функцию подушки безопасности.
Места для хранения
В вашем автомобиле предусмотрены множество различных мест для
хранения. Отделения для хранения под внешними посадочными
местами заднего сиденья можно использовать для хранения,
например, планшета.
01

Страница: 7

ЦЕНТРАЛЬНЫЙ ДИСПЛЕЙ
На центральном дисплее вы можете выполнять настройки и управ-
лять большинством функций. Центральный дисплей состоит из трех
основных панелей: главной панели, панели функций и панели прило-
жений. При прокручивании экрана вправо/влево вы можете из глав-
ной панели перейти на панель функций и панель приложений. Кроме
того, имеется верхняя панель, которая раскрывается, если перета-
щить верхнюю часть дисплея вниз.
Для изменения оформления центрального дисплея и дисплея
водителя выберите тему на верхней панели в Настройки My Car
Дисплеи. Здесь вы также можете выбрать для центрального дис-
плея темный или светлый фон.
Для возврата к главной панель из любой другой панели кратко
нажмите на кнопку Начало под дисплеем. При это открывается
последний режим просмотра главной панели. Если кратко нажать на
кнопку Начало еще раз, все рабочие панели на главной панели уста-
навливаются в стандартное положение.
Для чистки центрального дисплея заблокируйте сенсорную функ-
цию, длительно нажав на кнопку Начало под дисплеем. Для возобно-
вления работы дисплея кратко нажмите на кнопку Начало.
В строке состояния вверху дисплея отображаются значки текущего
состояния автомобиля. В левой части отображается информация о
сети и соединении, а в правой части – медиа-информация, часы и
индикация о функциях, действующих в фоновом режиме.
В строке климат-контроля в нижней части дисплея вы можете уста-
новить температуру и комфортный режим для сидений, нажав на
соответствующий значок. Откройте панель климат-контроля, нажав
на кнопку в центре строки климат-контроля.
01

Страница: 8

ПЕРЕДНИЕ СИДЕНЬЯ С
ЭЛЕКТРОПРИВОДОМ*
Используйте органы управления на внешней стороне сиденья, чтобы
отрегулировать, например, положение сиденья и опору поясницы*.
Две ручки, вместе образующие форму сиденья, используются для
регулировки положения сиденья. Третья ручка – джойстик* – исполь-
зуется для регулировки различных функций комфорта, например,
массажа*.
Ручки в форме сиденья
Измените положение подушки сиденья или переместите кресло цели-
ком, используя нижнюю ручку. Измените наклон спинки сиденья,
используя заднюю ручку.
Джойстик3
Настройки массажа*, подушек боковой поддержки*, опоры поясницы*
и длины подушки сиденья* выполняются с помощью джойстика.
1. Поверните ручку вверх/вниз, чтобы активировать настройки сиде-
ний на центральном дисплее.
2. Для перехода от одной функции к другой на центральном дисплее
поверните ручку вверх/вниз.
3. Для изменения настройки выбранной функции нажмите на верх-
нюю/нижнюю/переднюю/заднюю часть регулятора.
Сохранение позиций
1. Установите сиденье, внешние зеркала заднего вида и проекцион-
ный дисплей* в удобное положение и нажмите кнопку M на дверной
панели. В кнопке загорается световой индикатор.
2. В течение 3-х секунд нажмите на кнопку памяти 1 или 2. Вы услы-
шите звуковой сигнал, и световой индикатор в кнопке M гаснет.
Использование сохраненной позиции:
Когда дверь открыта – нажмите на одну из кнопок памяти и отпустите.
Когда дверь закрыта – удерживайте нажатой одну из кнопок памяти,
пока заданные настройки не будут выполнены.
3 На автомобилях с регулировкой опоры поясницы в четырех направлениях*
02

Страница: 9

СКЛАДЫВАНИЕ СПИНКИ ЗАДНЕГО
СИДЕНЬЯ
Складывая заднее сиденье, убедитесь, что спинка сиденья с подго-
ловником не касается спинки сиденья впереди. Перед тем как сло-
жить спинки, возможно, потребуется изменить положение передних
сидений.
Складывание спинок сидений
Заднее сиденье можно сложить только, когда автомобиль стоит
неподвижно и открыта дверь багажника. Убедитесь в отсутствии на
заднем сиденье пассажиров и посторонних предметов.
1. Вручную опустите подголовник среднего места.
2. Потяните вверх фиксатор спинки сиденья и одновременно сложите
спинку вперед. При опускании спинки фиксатор подголовников
автоматически поднимается вверх. Красный индикатор замка пока-
зывает, что спинка сидения находится в незафиксированном поло-
жении.
3. Фиксатор освобождает спинку сиденья, которая затем склады-
вается в горизонтальное положение вручную.
Возврат спинок в вертикальное положение
1. Переместите спинку сиденья вверх/назад так, чтобы зафиксиро-
вать замок.
2. Поднимите подголовники вручную.
3. При необходимости отрегулируйте положение подголовника сред-
него места.
02

Страница: 10

РУЛЕВОЕ КОЛЕСО
Отрегулируйте положение рулевого колеса
Положение рулевого колеса можно регулировать по высоте и по
вылету.
1. Переместите/потяните4 рычаг под рулевым колесом вперед/назад.
2. Установите рулевое колесо в удобное положение и верните рычаг
назад в запертое положение.
Левый набор кнопок
Функции поддержки водителя выбираются на дисплее водителя с
помощью кнопок со стрелками слева на рулевом колесе ( и ).
Символ поддержки водителя белого цвета означает, что функция
активирована. Серый символ означает, что действие функции пре-
рвано, или она находится в положении готовности.
Символы на дисплее водителя:
Ограничитель скорости помогает не превышать выбранную мак-
симальную скорость.
Круиз-контроль помогает поддерживать постоянную скорость.
Адаптивный круиз-контроль* помогает поддерживать постоян-
ную скорость и выбранное отставание по времени от двигающе-
гося впереди транспортного средства.
Pilot Assist помогает удерживать автомобиль на полосе движения
между линиями боковой разметки, используя поддержку управле-
нием, а также сохранять постоянную скорость и выбранное
отставание по времени от двигающегося впереди транспортного
средства.
Нажмите , чтобы включить или отменить выбранную функцию.
При кратком нажатии на / заданная скорость увеличивается/
уменьшается на 5 км/ч (5 миль/ч). Для плавного изменения скорости
02

Страница: 11

удерживайте кнопку нажатой и отпустите на нужном значении ско-
рости.
/ уменьшает/увеличивает расстояние до транспортного сред-
ства впереди, когда используется адаптивный круиз-контроль или
Pilot Assist.
При нажатии происходит также возврат к скорости, сохраненной
для выбранной функции.
Правый набор кнопок
Для управления дисплеем водителя используйте кнопки справа на
рулевом колесе.
Открыть/закрыть меню приложений на дисплее водителя,
откуда вы можете управлять бортовым компьютером, медиа-
плеером, телефоном и навигацией*.
Для перехода от одного приложения к другому нажимайте левую
или правую стрелку.
Выделить, отменить или подтвердить выбор, например, выбор
меню бортового компьютера или удаление сообщений на дис-
плее водителя.
Нажмите на стрелку вверх или вниз, чтобы пролистать функции
выбранного приложения.
Для увеличения/уменьшения громкости мультимедийного источ-
ника нажмите и . Если ни одна из других функций не активиро-
вана эти кнопки регулируют громкость звука.
Голосовое управление активируется кнопкой и позволяет с
помощью голоса управлять, например, мультимедийными устрой-
ствами, навигацией и настройками климата. Произнесите, например,
«Радио», «Увеличить температуру» или «Отмена».
Информацию о других голосовых командах см. в главе «Система
управления голосом» данного руководства, Quick Guide.
Бортовой компьютер
Дорожный компьютер показывает, например, величину пробега, рас-
ход топлива и среднюю скорость. Вы можете выбрать, какую инфор-
мацию бортового компьютера следует выводить на дисплей водителя.
Бортовой компьютер рассчитывает расстояние, оставшееся до
пустого бака. Для отображения различных опций используйте кнопки
справа на рулевом колесе. Когда на дисплее водителя показывается
«—-«, количество топлива недостаточно для расчета расстояния,
которое можно пройти на оставшемся в баке топливе. Без промедле-
ния заправьте автомобиль топливом.
4 Зависит от рынка.
02

Страница: 12

ЛЕВЫЙ ПОДРУЛЕВОЙ РЫЧАГ
Для управления функциями фар используется левый подрулевой
рычаг.
При выборе положения AUTO автомобиль распознает темное/светлое
время суток и соответствующим образом настраивает освещение,
например, когда наступает вечер или вы въезжаете в тоннель. Повер-
ните регулировочное колесико в положение , чтобы включить
дальний свет фар, который автоматически затемняется при появле-
нии встречного транспорта. Переместите подрулевой рычаг в сторону
рулевого колеса, чтобы вручную включить дальний свет фар, и в сто-
рону приборной панели, чтобы отключить.
Функция активного освещения поворотов*, следуя за поворотом
рулевого колеса, максимально подсвечивает повороты и перекрестки.
Функция активируется автоматически при запуске двигателя, и ее
можно отключить на панели функций центрального дисплея, .
Функция освещения при подходе к автомобилю включает внешнее
освещение и освещение салона, когда автомобиль отпирается клю-
чом, облегчая ваш путь к автомобилю в темное время суток.
Функция освещения при выходе из автомобиля включает часть
внешнего освещения после того, как автомобиль запирается, чтобы
осветить пространство вокруг автомобиля в темное время суток.
Функцию можно активировать после остановки двигателя, для этого
переместите левый подрулевой рычаг в сторону приборной панели и
отпустите. Продолжительность действия функции освещения при
выходе из автомобиля можно выбрать на центральном дисплее.
Обнуление счетчика пройденного пути
Для сброса вручную всей информации в счетчике пройденного пути
(ТМ) длительно нажмите на кнопку RESET. При кратком нажатии
сбрасывается только пройденный путь. Счетчик пройденного пути с
автоматическим режимом (ТА) обнуляется автоматически, когда авто-
мобиль не использовался в течение 4-х часов.
02

Страница: 13

ПРАВЫЙ ПОДРУЛЕВОЙ РЫЧАГ
Правый подрулевой рычаг используется для управления щетками
стеклоочистителей и датчиком дождя.
– Переместите подрулевой рычаг вниз, чтобы сделать одиночный ход
на ветрового стекле.
– Переместите рычаг последовательно вверх для включения интер-
вального режима, стандартной и высокой скорости очистки.
– Регулировочным колесиком выберите интервал очистки.
– Переместите подрулевой рычаг в сторону рулевого колеса, чтобы
включить омывание ветрового стекла и фар, и в сторону приборной
панели, чтобы включить омывание заднего стекла.
Нажмите на кнопку датчика дождя, чтобы активировать/отклю-
чить датчик дождя. Рычаг очистителя должен находиться в поло-
жении 0 или в режиме одиночных ходов. Датчик дождя контроли-
рует количество воды на ветровом стекле и автоматически вклю-
чает стеклоочистители. Поверните регулировочное кольцо
вверх/вниз для увеличения/уменьшения чувствительности дат-
чика дождя.
Нажмите для интервального режима работы очистителя заднего
стекла.
Нажмите для режима непрерывной работы очистителя заднего
стекла.
Используйте сервисное положение, если вы хотите,
например, заменить, очистить или поднять щетки стекло-
очистителей. На панели функций центрального дисплея
нажмите кнопку Серв. полож. стеклоочист., чтобы активи-
ровать или отключить сервисное положение.
02

Страница: 14

КЛИМАТ В САЛОНЕ
Настроить функции климатической установки для передней и задней
части салона можно на центральном дисплее, кнопками на централь-
ной консоли и сзади на тоннельной консоли*. Некоторыми функциями
климата можно также управлять с помощью голосовых команд.
Значок для доступа на панель климат-контроля расположен
посередине в нижней части центрального дисплея. Текст
Clean Zone синего цвета означает, что условия, необходи-
мые для обеспечения высокого качества воздуха в салоне,
выполняются.
– На панели климат-контроля нажмите AUTO для управления различ-
ными функциями климат-контроля в автоматическом режиме. При
кратком нажатии включается автоматическое управление рецирку-
ляцией воздуха, кондиционированием воздуха и распределением
воздушных потоков.
При длительном нажатии включается автоматическое управление
рециркуляцией воздуха, кондиционированием воздуха и распреде-
лением воздушных потоков и устанавливаются стандартные
настройки температуры и режима работы вентилятора: 22 °C (72 °F)
и режим 3 (режим 2 для заднего сиденья5). Вы можете изменить
температуру и скорость вращения вентилятора без отключения
автоматического режима регулировки климата.
– Нажмите на один из значков в строке климат-контроля в нижней
части центрального дисплея, чтобы отрегулировать температуру,
обогрев сидений* и скорость вентилятора.
Для синхронизации температуры во всех зонах с температурой на
стороне водителя, нажмите на значок температуры на стороне води-
теля и на Синхронизация температуры .
Подготовка климата*
Подготовку климата можно установить на центральном дисплее авто-
мобиля и с помощью мобильного приложения Volvo On Call*.
В подготовку климата входит обогрев* или вентиляция салона перед
поездкой. Подготовку климата можно запустить напрямую или с
помощью таймера.
Прямой запуск подготовки климата в салоне
1. На центральном дисплее откройте панель климат-контроля.
2. Выберите закладку Климат-контроль в реж. парковки и затем
нажмите на Подготовка.
Установка таймера подготовки климата
1. На центральном дисплее откройте панель климат-контроля.
2. Выберите вкладку Климат-контроль в реж. парковки
Добавить таймер и установите дату/день.
Система контроля качества воздуха IAQS*
IAQS входит в систему Clean Zone Interior Package* и является полно-
стью автоматической системой, которая очищает воздух в салоне от
таких примесей, как твердые микрочастицы, углеводороды, оксиды
азота и приповерхностный озон. Функция активируется на верхней
панели центрального дисплея в Настройки Климат-контроль
Датчик качества воздуха.
5 Для автомобилей с 4 климатическими зонами*.
02

Страница: 15

ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЕ
Вы можете воспроизводить/использовать голосовые команды для
управления мультимедиа, sms-сообщениями, телефонными звонками
и подключать автомобиль к Интернету через различные внешние
устройства, например, смартфоны. Для подключения устройств необ-
ходимо установить в электросистеме автомобиля положение зажига-
ния не ниже I.
Модем автомобиля6
Самый простой и эффективный способ подключения автомобиля к
Интернету – это использование собственного модема автомобиля.
Модем обеспечивает максимальную пропускную способность, активи-
руется автоматически при каждой поездке и не нуждается в подклю-
чении смартфона.
1. Установите персональную SIM-карту в держатель, расположенный
на уровне пола со стороны пассажира.
2. На верхней панели нажмите Настройки Связь Общий доступ
к модему автомобиля.
3. Для активирования внесите метку в окошко Общий доступ к
модему автомобиля.
Совместное использование Интернета
Когда автомобиль подключен к Интернету через модем, вы можете
«поделиться» Интернетом (точка доступа Wi-Fi) с другими устрой-
ствами. На верхней панели нажмите Настройки, а затем Связь
Точка доступа Wi-Fi автомобиля.
Bluetooth
Используйте Bluetooth прежде всего для управления телефонными
звонками, sms-сообщениями и мультимедиа в вашем телефоне через
системы автомобиля. Вы также можете подключить автомобиль к
Интернету через Bluetooth. Вы можете одновременно подключить два
02

Страница: 16

устройства Bluetooth из которых одно можно использовать только
для потоковой мультимедийной трансляции. Два последних из под-
ключенных телефонов будут автоматически подсоединяться, когда
автомобиль будет использоваться в следующий раз, если в телефоне
активирована функция Bluetooth. В списке сохраняется до 20
устройств для удобства их подсоединения в дальнейшем.
1. Активируйте в телефоне функцию Bluetooth. Для подключения к
Интернету активируйте в телефоне также и общий доступ к Интер-
нету.
2. Откройте на центральном дисплее рабочую панель для телефона.
3. Нажмите Добавить телефон или, если у вас уже есть подключен-
ный телефон, нажмите на Изменить, а затем на Добавить
телефон.
4. Выберите телефон, который вы хотите подключить, и выполните
действия, указанные на центральном дисплее и в телефоне. Обрат-
ите внимание, что в некоторых телефонах необходимо активиро-
вать функцию сообщений.
Wi-Fi
В автомобиле, подключенном к Интернету через Wi-Fi, вы можете с
более высокой скоростью по сравнению с Bluetooth пользоваться
потоковыми онлайн-услугами через приложения автомобиля, напри-
мер, веб-радио и музыкой, загружать/обновлять программное обеспе-
чение и многое другое. Wi-Fi-подключение от смартфона действует в
качестве точки доступа для автомобиля и других внешних устройств в
автомобиле.
1. Активируйте в телефоне функцию совместного использования
Интернета.
2. На верхней панели центрального дисплея нажмите Настройки.
3. Нажмите Связь Wi-Fi и для активирования внесите метку в око-
шко для Wi-Fi-подключения.
Необходимо помнить, что некоторые телефоны после потери кон-
такта с автомобилем прекращают совместное использование Интер-
нета. Поэтому при следующем использовании этого телефона функ-
цию совместного использования Интернета следует вновь активиро-
вать.
USB
Вы можете подключить внешнее устройство к USB разъему для вос-
произведения медиа-данных. USB разъем также используется для
Apple CarPlay* и Android Auto*. В автомобиле с двумя USB разъемами
подсоедините телефон к разъему с белой рамкой. Внешнее устрой-
ство заряжается, когда оно подключено к автомобилю.
Разъемы USB (тип А) находятся в отделении для хранения подло-
котника между сиденьями.
Электрические гнезда
В автомобиле установлены следующие электрические гнезда:
Гнездо 12 В.
Гнездо 12 В и гнездо 230 В*. Гнездо 12 В* также имеется в багаж-
ном/грузовом отсеке.
6 Только автомобили с P-SIM*. В автомобилях с системой Volvo On Call* для этих услуг
будет использоваться Интернет-подключение через модем автомобиля.
02

Страница: 17

7 Информацию о телефонах, совместимых с автомобилем, см. www.volvocars.com/intl/
support
ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕННЫХ
УСТРОЙСТВ
Вы можете подключить внешние устройства, например, для того,
чтобы в автомобиле управлять телефонными звонками и воспроизво-
дить медиа-данные через аудио- и мультимедийную систему автомо-
биля.
Обращение с телефонными звонками7
Вы можете совершать звонки и принимать звонки, поступающие на
телефон, подключенный к автомобилю через Bluetooth.
Совершить звонок с центрального дисплея
1. На главной панели откройте рабочую панель Телефон. Выберите
способ выполнения вызова: история звонков, выбор в списке кон-
тактов или ввод номера с клавиатуры.
2. Нажмите .
Совершить звонок с помощью правого набора кнопок на рулевом
колесе
1. Нажмите , а затем или , чтобы открыть Телефон.
2. Перелистайте список звонков с помощью и выберите, нажав .
Кроме того вы можете управлять звонками с помощью голосовых
команд. Нажмите на кнопку голосового управления справа на
рулевом колесе. Информацию о голосовых командах см. раздел
«Голосовое управление» данного руководства Quick Guide.
Воспроизведение медиа-данных
Для воспроизведения звука от внешнего устройства, оно должно
быть подключено к автомобилю; различные способы подключения
рассмотрены в предыдущем разделе.
Устройство, подключенное через Bluetooth
1. Включите воспроизведение на подключенном устрой-
стве.
2. На панели приложений центрального дисплея откройте
приложение Bluetooth. Воспроизведение запускается.
02

Страница: 18

8 Apple и CarPlay являются зарегистрированными торговыми марками, принадлежа-
щими Apple Inc.
Устройство, подключенное к USB
1. На панели приложений запустите приложение USB.
2. Выберите композицию, которую вы хотите прослушать.
Воспроизведение запускается.
Mp3-плеер или iPod
1. Включите воспроизведение на устройстве.
2. В зависимости от способа подключения откройте при-
ложение iPod или USB. Для воспроизведения с iPod
выберите приложение iPod независимо от способа под-
ключения устройства. Воспроизведение запускается.
Apple® CarPlay®*8 и Android Auto*
CarPlay и Android Auto позволяют пользоваться в автомобиле некото-
рыми приложениями устройства iOS или Android например, чтобы
воспроизводить музыку или слушать подкасты. Взаимодействие осу-
ществляется через центральный дисплей автомобиля или устройство.
Для использования CarPlay вы должны активировать Siri в устройстве
iOS. Необходимо также подсоединить устройство к Интернету через
Wi-Fi или мобильную сеть. Для использования Android Auto в устрой-
стве Android должно быть предварительно установлено приложение
Android Auto. Необходимо также подсоединить устройство к USB
разъему автомобиля.
1. Подсоедините устройство к USB разъему с белой рам-
кой.
2. Чтобы активировать Android Auto, нажмите Android
Auto на панели приложений.
3. Прочитайте условия соглашения и затем нажмите
Принять, чтобы выполнить подключение.
4. Нажмите на нужное приложение.
Для активирования голосового управления с помощью CarPlay и
Android Auto длительно нажмите кнопку справа на рулевом колесе.
При кратком нажатии вместо этого активируется собственная
система голосового управления автомобиля.
Во время использования CarPlay функция Bluetooth отключена. Для
подключения автомобиля к Интернету используйте Wi-Fi или модем
автомобиля*.
02

Страница: 19

ГЛАВНАЯ ПАНЕЛЬ
При включении центрального дисплея появляется главная панель, на
которой вы можете открыть рабочие панели Навигация, Медиа, Теле-
фон и последнее из использованных приложений или функций авто-
мобиля.
Навигация – нажмите, чтобы открыть навигационную систему
Sensus Navigation*.
Выбор пункта назначения свободным текстовым поиском –
разверните панель инструментов с помощью стрелки «Вниз» на
левой стороне и нажмите . Изображение карты переключается
на свободный текстовый поиск. Введите поисковое слово.
Указать пункт назначения на карте – разверните карту с
помощью . Нажмите и удерживайте позицию, до которой вы
хотите доехать, и выберите Перейти сюда.
Удалить пункт назначения – нажмите на , чтобы открыть план
маршрута. Нажмите на мусорную корзину, чтобы удалить один
промежуточный пункт назначения в плане маршрута, или нажмите
Удалить план, чтобы удалить план маршрута целиком.
Обновление кары9 – на панели приложений нажмите Центр
загрузки. Для Карты показывается количество доступных обно-
влений карты. Нажмите Карты Установить Подтвердить,
чтобы обновить карту или установить выбранную карту. Вы также
можете на сайте support.volvocars.com загрузить карты в USB-
накопитель, а затем перенести их в автомобиль.
Медиа – здесь отображаются, например, сведения о музыке,
выбранной вами на внешнем устройстве, или FM-радио, если вы
выбрали его на панели приложений. Нажмите на рабочую панель,
чтобы открыть настройки. Здесь вы можете увидеть свою музы-
кальную фонотеку, радиостанции и многое другое
Телефон – здесь открывается функция телефона. При нажатии
на рабочую панель она раскрывается. Здесь вы можете совер-
шить звонок, используя историю звонков или список контактов,
или набрать номер телефона на клавиатуре. После выбора
номера нажмите .
Последнее использованное приложение или функция автомо-
биля – здесь вы видите последнее из использованных приложе-
ний или функций автомобиля, которое не показывается ни на
одной из других рабочих панелей, например, Состояние авто или
Действия водителя. Вы можете нажать на эту рабочую панель,
чтобы открыть последнюю использованную функцию.
9 Доступность функции определяется условиями рынка.
03

Страница: 20

ПАНЕЛЬ ФУНКЦИЙ И ПАНЕЛЬ ПРИЛОЖЕНИЙ
Панель функций
При прокручивании главной панели слева направо10 открывается
панель функций. На этой панели активируются/отключаются различ-
ные функции автомобиля, например, Проекционный дисплей* и
Помощь при парковке. Они активируются/отключаются при нажатии
на соответствующий символ. Некоторые функции открываются в
отдельном окне.
Панель приложений
Прокрутите экран главной панели справа налево10, чтобы перейти на
панель приложений. Здесь вы найдете приложения, включенные в
комплект поставки автомобиля, и приложения, которые вы загрузили
и установили самостоятельно.
Использование и обновление приложений и систем
В Центр загрузки на панели приложений вы можете обно-
вить различные системы автомобиля. Это возможно только,
когда автомобиль подключен к Интернету. Центр загрузки
позволяет:
Загрузить приложения – нажмите Новые прилож. и выберите при-
ложение. Выберите Установить, чтобы загрузить приложение.
Обновить приложения – нажмите Установить все, чтобы обновить
все приложения. Вы также можете нажать Обновления прилож.,
чтобы открыть список доступных обновлений. Выберите приложение
и нажмите Установить.
Удалить приложения – нажмите Обновления прилож. и выберите
приложение. Нажмите Удалить, чтобы удалить приложение.
Обновить системное ПО – нажмите Системные обновления, чтобы
открыть список обновлений, которые можно установить в автомо-
биле. Нажмите Установить все внизу списка, чтобы обновить все
программные средства, или Установить, чтобы обновить отдельный
программный продукт. Если список не требуется, в кнопке
Системные обновления выберите Установить все.
Перемещение значков
Приложения и кнопки функций автомобиля на панели приложений и
панели функций можно переносить по своему выбору.
1. Нажмите и удерживайте приложение или кнопку.
2. Перетащите приложение или кнопку на имеющееся на панели сво-
бодное место и отпустите.
10 Автомобили с левосторонним управлением. В автомобилях с правосторонним
управлением – прокрутите в другую сторону.
03

Страница: 21

ВЕРХНЯЯ ПАНЕЛЬ
Вы можете потянуть вниз вкладку в верхней части дисплея, чтобы
раскрыть верхнюю панель. На этой панели вы получаете доступ в
Настройки, Руководство владельца, Профиль и сообщениям,
сохраненным в автомобиле.
Персональные настройки
В Настройки вы можете выполнить различные индивидуальные
настройки, например, для дисплеев, зеркал, переднего сиденья, нави-
гации*, аудио/медиасистемы, языка и голосового управления.
Профили водителя
Если автомобилем пользуются несколько водителей,
каждый из них может иметь собственный профиль водителя.
Перед каждой поездкой вы можете выбрать свой профиль
водителя, в котором сохранены ваши индивидуальный
настройки. Количество профилей водителя зависит от количества
имеющихся для автомобиля ключей. Профиль Гость не присоединен
ни к одному из ключей.
Когда автомобиль отпирается, активируется последний задейство-
ванный профиль водителя. Для изменения профиля водителя, на
верхней панели выберите Профиль.
Профили водителя можно привязать к ключам автомобиля, и когда
автомобиль опирается, он автоматически устанавливает ваши инди-
видуальные настройки. Ключ привязывается к профилю в Настройки
Система Профили водителей. Выберите один из профилей
водителя (профиль Гость нельзя привязать ни к одному из ключей).
Вновь появляется главная панель. Перетащите вниз верхнюю панель
еще раз, повторите указанные выше шаги, выберите Редакт. для
установленного профиля и затем Связать ключ.
Индивидуальный режим вождения
Если вы хотите персонализировать один из режимов вождения
Comfort, Eco или Dynamic, активируйте этот режим вождения в
Настройки My Car Индивидуальный режим вождения.
Громкость различных систем
Если вы хотите отрегулировать или отключить звук систем автомо-
биля, например, звук при касании экрана, перейдите в Настройки
Звук Громкость системы.
03

Страница: 22

ПОДДЕРЖКА ВОДИТЕЛЯ
В вашем автомобиле установлен ряд функций, которые помогут вам
обеспечить безопасное вождение и предотвратить аварии. Эти функ-
ции активируются на панели функций центрального дисплея. Не
забывайте, что функции поддержки водителя являются только вспо-
могательным инструментом, и только вы, как водитель, всегда несете
полную ответственность за безопасное управление автомобилем.
Ниже перечислены некоторые из них:
City Safety™
City Safety11 может оказывать помощь в критических ситуациях,
чтобы предотвратить или ослабить столкновение с транспортными
средствами, крупными животными, пешеходами или велосипедистами.
В случае опасности столкновения предупреждения подаются в виде
световых и звуковых сигналов и вибрации педали тормоза, чтобы
помочь вам реагировать вовремя. Если вы не успеваете среагировать
вовремя, и столкновение практически неизбежно, автомобиль может
автоматически задействовать торможение. Поддержка управлением в
системе City Safety может также усилить предпринятый вами рулевой
маневр, если его недостаточно для того, чтобы предотвратить стол-
кновение. Система City Safety активируется вместе с запуском двига-
теля, и ее нельзя отключить.
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
BLIS может информировать вас о транспортных средствах,
которые находятся в слепой зоне, а также о быстро прибли-
жающихся сзади транспортных средствах в соседних с
вашим автомобилем рядах.
Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)*
CTA с функцией автоматического торможения – функция
поддержки водителя, дополняющая BLIS, может предупре-
ждать о транспорте в поперечном направлении за автомоби-
лем. Если оставить без внимания предупреждение, подавае-
мое CTA, и столкновение практически неизбежно, функция
может остановить автомобиль. CTA активируется при вклю-
чении передачи заднего хода или, когда автомобиль катится
назад.
Функция предупреждения о сходе с полосы
Функция предупреждения о сходе с полосы (Lane Keeping Aid)
может помочь вам уменьшить опасность непреднамеренного
выезда автомобиля за пределы полосы движения. Тип необ-
ходимой поддержки можно выбрать на верхней панели цен-
трального дисплея в Настройки My Car IntelliSafe
Режим Lane Keeping Aid.
Поддержка управлением при опасности столкновения
Функция Помощь в предотвращ. столкновений может
помочь уменьшить опасность непреднамеренного выезда
автомобиля за пределы полосы движения и/или столкнове-
ния с другим транспортным средством/препятствием,
активно возвращая автомобиль назад в свой ряд и/или объ-
езжая препятствие. В функцию входят подфункции под-
держки управлением в случае опасности ухода с проезжей
части, поддержки управлением в случае опасности столкно-
вения с встречным транспортом и поддержки управлением в
случае опасности наезда сзади*.
Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist12 – это функция комфорта, которая может помочь удержи-
вать автомобиль в пределах занимаемой полосы движения и на
заданном расстоянии от движущегося впереди транспортного сред-
ства. Pilot Assist выбирается и активируется кнопками слева на руле-
вом колесе. Для действия функции поддержки управлением необхо-
димо в том числе, чтобы обе руки водителя находились на рулевом
колесе и были видны линии боковой разметки полосы движения.
Когда поддержка управлением действует, на дисплее водителя ото-
бражается ЗЕЛЕНЫЙ символ рулевого колеса.
11 Представлена не на всех рынках.
12 В зависимости от условий рынка эта функция может входить в стандартную или
опционную комплектацию.
04

Страница: 23

ПОМОЩЬ ПРИ ПАРКОВКЕ
Активная помощь при парковке*
Система активной помощи при парковке может помочь водителю
маневрировать при выполнении парковки. Задача водителя – следить
за ситуацией вокруг автомобиля, выполнять инструкции на централь-
ном дисплее, выбирать передачи, регулировать скорость и быть гото-
вым к тому, чтобы затормозить/остановить автомобиль.
Парковка с помощью системы активной помощи при парковке
Двигайтесь со скоростью не выше 30 км/ч (20 миль/ч)
перед выполнением параллельной парковки и не выше
20 км/ч (12 миль/ч) перед выполнением перпендикулярной
парковки. Когда функция ищет пространство для пар-
ковки, расстояние между автомобилем и парковочными
местами должно быть в пределах примерно 1 метра
(3 футов).
1. Нажмите кнопку Въезд на парковку на панели функ-
ций или на изображении с камеры.
2. Будьте готовы остановить автомобиль, когда графика и
текст на центральном дисплее сообщат о том, что под-
ходящее для парковки место найдено. Появляется
всплывающее окно.
3. Выберите Паралл. парковка или Перпендик.
парковка и включите передачу заднего хода.
4. Следуйте инструкциям на центральном дисплее.
Выезд с параллельной парковки с помощью системы активной
помощи при парковке
Функцию можно использовать только в случае параллельной пар-
ковки.
1. Нажмите кнопку Выезд с парковки на панели функций
или на изображении с камеры.
2. Указателем поворота выберите направление, в котором
автомобиль будет выезжать из парковочного кармана.
3. Следуйте инструкциям на центральном дисплее.
Парковочная камера*
Парковочная камера может помочь водителю при маневрировании в
тесных местах, обозначая препятствия с помощью изображения с
камеры и графики на центральном дисплее. Режимы работы камеры и
вспомогательные линии выбираются на центральном дисплее. Не
забывайте о том, что объект/препятствие на самом деле могут быть
ближе к автомобилю по сравнению с тем, как они воспринимаются на
дисплее. Парковочная камера активируется автоматически при вклю-
чении передачи заднего хода или вручную на центральном дисплее:
– На панели функций нажмите кнопку Камера, чтобы
вручную активировать/отключить функцию.
04

Страница: 24

ЧИСТОЕ УДОВОЛЬСТВИЕ ОТ ВОЖДЕНИЯ
Планирование поездки и экономичное вождению помогут вам снизить
расход топлива и уровень выбросов углекислого газа и других загряз-
няющих веществ. В результате вы снижаете свое воздействие на
окружающую среду и свои затраты на топливо. На некоторые фак-
торы вы можете повлиять, а другие факторы от вас не зависят. Ниже
вы найдете несколько полезных советов.
Для правильного планирования поездки всегда
• Планируйте поездку – многочисленные ненужные остановки и
неравномерная скорость езды приводят к повышению расхода топ-
лива.
Для экономичного вождения
• Активируйте режим вождения Eco, который обеспечивает наиболее
энергосберегающее управление автомобилем.
• Не допускайте работы двигателя на холостых оборотах – выклю-
чайте двигатель при длительном ожидании.
• Двигайтесь с постоянной скоростью и планируйте ваши действия
так, чтобы сократить количество торможений.
• Следите и регулярно проверяйте давление в шинах. Для оптималь-
ного результата выбирайте давление ECO.
• Не ездите с открытыми окнами.
Факторы, которые не зависят от ваших действий
• Дорожная обстановка.
• Дорожное покрытие и рельеф местности.
• Наружная температура и встречный ветер.
Другие полезные советы, связанные с экономичным вождением, см. в
руководстве для владельца.
04

Страница: 25

ГОЛОСОВЫЕ КОМАНДЫ
Система голосового управления позволяет с помощью заранее уста-
новленных голосовых команд13 управлять некоторыми функциями
медиаплеера, телефона с Bluetooth-подключением, системы климат-
контроля и навигационной системы Volvo*. Голосовое управление
активируется при нажатии соответствующей кнопки справа на руле-
вом колесе.
Следующие команды вы, как правило, можете использовать в любой
момент:
• Повторить: повторяется последняя голосовая информация теку-
щего диалога.
• Справка: запускается диалог-подсказка. В ответ система произно-
сит команды, которые могут использоваться в данной ситуации,
подсказывает или приводит пример.
• Отмена: диалог прерывается14.
Голосовые команды для телефона
• Позвонить [контакт]
• Позвонить [номер телефона]
• Недавние звонки
• Читать сообщение
• Сообщение для [контакт]15
Голосовые команды для радио и медиаплеера
• Мультимедиа
• Слушать [исполнитель]
• Слушать [название композиции]
• Слушать [название композиции] из [альбом]
• Слушать [название ТВ канала]*16
• Слушать [радиостанция]
• Настроиться на [частота]
• Настроиться на [частота] [частотный диапазон]
• Радио
• Радио FM
• Радио AM17
• DAB*
• TB*
• CD*
• USB
• iPod
• Bluetooth
• Похожая музыка
Голосовые команды для климат-контроля
• Климат-контроль
• Установить температуру на X градусов
• Увеличить температуру/Уменьшить температуру
05

Страница: 26

• Синхронизировать температуру
• Воздух на ноги/Воздух на тело
• Выключить воздух на ноги/Выключить воздух на тело
• Установить вентиляцию на максимум/Выключить вентилятор
• Увеличить обороты вентилятора/Уменьшить обороты
вентилятора
• Включить авторежим
• Включить кондиционер/Выключить кондиционер
• Включить рециркуляцию/Выключить рециркуляцию
• Включить обогрев стекла/Выключить обогрев стекла
• Включить максимальный обогрев стекла/Выключить
максимальный обогрев стекла
• Включить электрообогрев стекла/Выключить электрoобогрев
стекла*
• Включить обогрев заднего стекла/Выключить обогрев заднего
стекла
• Включить подогрев рулевого колеса/Выключить подогрев
рулевого колеса*
• Увеличить подогрев рулевого колеса/Уменьшить подогрев
рулевого колеса*
• Включить нагрев сиденья/Выключить нагрев сиденья*
• Увеличить нагрев сиденья/Уменьшить нагрев сиденья*
• Включить вентиляцию сидений/Выключить вентиляцию
сидений*
• Увеличить вентиляцию сидений/Уменьшить вентиляцию
сидений*
Голосовые команды для навигационной системы*
• Навигация
• Домой
• Доехать до [город]
• Доехать до [адрес]
• Добавить перекресток
• Доехать до [почтовый индекс]
• Доехать до [контакт]
• Искать [категория POI]
• Искать [категория POI] [город]
• Искать [название POI]
• Изменить страну/Изменить штат18, 19
• Показать избранное
• Удаление планa поездки
• Повторить голосовое указание
• Выключить голосовое сопровождение
• Включить голосовое сопровождение
13 Только некоторые рынки.
14 Обратите внимание, что эта команда прерывает диалог только, когда система мол-
чит. Для этого длительно нажмите на кнопку голосового управления, пока не услы-
шите два тональных сигнала.
15 Только некоторые телефоны могут отправлять сообщения через автомобиль.
Информацию о совместимых телефонах см. support.volvocars.com.
16 Только некоторые рынки.
17 Наличие зависит от модели автомобиля и/или условий рынка.
18 Для европейских стран вместо «государства» используется «страна».
19 Для Бразилии и Индии район поиска изменяется на центральном дисплее.
05

Страница: 27

СПЕЦИАЛЬНЫЕ
РУБРИКИ
В руководстве для владельца автомобиля и
других руководствах вы найдете инструкции
по технике безопасности и все тексты под
рубриками «Предупреждение», «Важно» и
«Внимание», которые вы должны прочитать.
Некоторые функции действуют только на
определенных рынках.
ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ
НАЧАЛО РАБОТЫ
Volvo On Call – Услуги этой системы дей-
ствуют только в тех регионах, где партнеры
Volvo On Call обеспечивают покрытие в сети
сотовой связи, и на тех рынках, где система
Volvo On Call доступна.
Как и в случае с мобильными телефонами
атмосферные помехи или слабая поддержка
сигнала могут приводить к отказу в подсое-
динении, например, в наименее населенных
регионах.
Тексты под рубриками «Предупреждение»,
«Важно» и «Внимание» для услуг Volvo On
Call можно найти в руководстве для вла-
дельца, а также в соглашении о подписке
Volvo On Call.
Sensus Navigation* – Внимательно следите
за дорожной ситуацией, ваша основная
задача – управление автомобилем. Соблю-
дайте действующие правила дорожного дви-
жения и руководствуйтесь здравым смы-
слом. При определенном состоянии дорог,
например, в сложных погодных условиях или
в зависимости от времени года, некоторые
рекомендации могут оказаться не столь
достоверными.
ВНЕШНИЕ ЭЛЕМЕНТЫ – ОБЗОР
Дверь багажника – Избегайте защемления
при открытии/закрытии багажника. Перед
тем, как закрыть багажник, убедитесь в
отсутствии рядом людей, так как травмы
при защемлении могут иметь серьезные
последствия. Будьте всегда внимательны
при управлении крышкой багажника.
Запирание/отпирание с помощью функции
без ключа* – Следите за тем, чтобы дети и
другие пассажиры не были зажаты при
закрытии всех окон дистанционным ключом
или открытии окон функцией без ключа* с
помощью дверных ручек.
ЭЛЕМЕНТЫ ИНТЕРЬЕРА – ОБЗОР
Подушка безопасности пассажира всегда
активирована, если в автомобиле не уста-
новлен переключатель для включения/
отключения подушки безопасности пасса-
жира. Запрещается устанавливать на пере-
днее сиденье пассажира повернутое против
движения детское кресло, когда подушка
безопасности активирована. Подушка
безопасности пассажира должна быть
всегда активирована, если пассажир (взрос-
лый или ребенок) сидит на переднем
сиденье по ходу движения. Не размещайте
предметы перед приборной панелью и
поверх нее, там где находится подушка
безопасности для переднего пассажирского
сиденья.
Дистанционный ключ обязательно берите
с собой, когда покидаете автомобиль. Сле-
дите за тем, чтобы в электросистеме авто-
мобиля было установлено положение зажи-
гания 0, особенно, если в автомобиле нахо-
дятся дети.
Обязательно используйте стояночный тор-
моз при парковке на склоне. Включение
передачи или положения P в автоматичес-
кой коробке передач не во всех ситуациях
достаточно для того, чтобы удерживать
автомобиль на месте.
ПЕРЕДНИЕ СИДЕНЬЯ С ЭЛЕКТРОПРИВО-
ДОМ
Отрегулируйте положение сиденья водителя
перед поездкой, ни в коем случае не делайте
этого во время езды. Убедитесь, что
сиденье зафиксировано — это поможет избе-
жать травм при резком торможении или ава-
рии.
СКЛАДЫВАНИЕ СПИНКИ ЗАДНЕГО
СИДЕНЬЯ
Убедитесь, что после складывания и воз-
врата спинок сидений в вертикальное поло-
жение они надежно зафиксированы, и под-
головники также надежно зафиксированы
после подъема.
КЛИМАТ В САЛОНЕ
На сиденье с электрообогревом* не дол-
жны находиться люди, у которых ослаблена
температурная чувствительность, или по
каким-то причинам они сталкиваются с
трудностями при управлении регуляторами
для обогрева сидений. В противном случае
возможны ожоги.
Функция подготовки климата может запу-
скаться таймером, который программи-
руется задолго до поездки. Не используйте
предварительное кондиционирование, если
в автомобиле установлен обогреватель*:
• В закрытом непроветриваемом помеще-
нии. Во время работы отопителя выде-
ляются выхлопные газы.
• Вблизи горючих и воспламеняющихся
материалов. Топливо, газы, высокая
трава, древесная мука и т.п. могут воспла-
мениться.
• Если существует опасность блокирования
выхлопной трубы обогревателя, например,
когда передняя правая колесная ниша
заполнена снегом, вентиляция обогрева-
теля может быть нарушена.
ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЕ
• Пользуйтесь только полностью исправ-
ными устройствами, не имеющими повреж-
дений. Устройства должны иметь
маркировку CE, UL или аналогичную мар-
кировку по безопасности.
• Устройства должны быть предназначены
для подсоединения к сети 230 В и 50 Гц с
помощью контактов, соответствующих
гнезду автомобиля.
• Не допускайте, чтобы на гнездо, контакт
или дополнительное устройство попадала
вода или другая жидкость. Не дотрагивай-
тесь и не используйте гнездо с признаками
неисправности или если в него попала
вода или другая жидкость.
• Не подсоединяйте к гнезду разветвители,
адаптеры или удлинители, так как они
могут нарушить защитные функции гнезда.
• В гнезде установлена защитная шторка.
Следите за тем, чтобы не проткнуть и не
повредить гнездо, чтобы не вывести из
строя шторку. Запрещается оставлять
детей без присмотра в автомобиле, когда
гнездо находится под напряжением.
ПОДДЕРЖКА ВОДИТЕЛЯ
Установленные в автомобиле системы под-
держки водителя предназначены для
использования в качестве дополнительных
инструментов, однако они не могут обеспе-
чить необходимые действия во всех ситуа-
циях и в любых транспортных, дорожных и
погодных условиях. Они ни при каких усло-
виях не могут заменить внимание и оценку
ситуации водителем. Только водитель отве-
чает за безопасное поведение автомобиля
на дороге, должен поддерживать подходя-
щую скорость и расстояние до других транс-
портных средств и соблюдать действующие
законы и правила дорожного движения.
Только водитель всегда несет единоличную
ответственность за своевременное тормо-
жение и управление автомобилем.
Прежде чем приступить к использованию
автомобиля мы рекомендуем прочитать все
разделы руководства для владельца, свя-
занные с системами поддержки водителя,
установленными в автомобиле.
ПОМОЩЬ ПРИ ПАРКОВКЕ
Активная помощь при парковке является
дополнительной функцией поддержки води-
теля, однако она не может обеспечить необ-
ходимые действия во всех ситуациях. Эта
функция помогает водителю только при
выполнении параллельной или перпендику-
лярной парковки. Только водитель несет
06

Страница: 28

всю полноту ответственности за безопасную
парковку и торможение автомобиля, когда
это необходимо. В процессе сканирования
система может пропустить объекты в глу-
бине парковочного кармана. Водитель
всегда несет ответственность за правиль-
ную оценку возможности парковочного про-
странства, предлагаемого системой актив-
ной помощи при парковке.
Парковочная камера является дополни-
тельной функцией поддержки водителя во
время парковки автомобиля. Эта функция ни
при каких условиях не может заменить вни-
мание и оценку ситуации водителем. Камеры
имеют мертвые/слепые зоны, в которых они
не могут обнаруживать препятствия. Осо-
бенно внимательно следите за людьми и
животными, находящимися вблизи автомо-
биля. Помните, что во время парковки пере-
дняя часть автомобиля может заехать на
сторону встречного транспорта.
Прежде чем приступить к использованию
автомобиля мы рекомендуем прочитать все
разделы руководства для владельца, свя-
занные с системами поддержки водителя,
установленными в автомобиле.
ГОЛОСОВЫЕ КОМАНДЫ
Во время движения автомобиля, прежде
всего, водитель несет ответственность за
соблюдение мер безопасности и всех необ-
ходимых правил дорожного движения.
ВАЖНО
ЭЛЕМЕНТЫ ИНТЕРЬЕРА – ОБЗОР
Режим вождения OFF ROAD запрещается
использовать при движении с прицепом без
подключения контакта прицепа. В против-
ном случае существует опасность поврежде-
ния пневмобаллонов подвески.
Модуль проекционного дисплея*, с кото-
рого проецируется информация, располо-
жен в приборной панели. Чтобы не допу-
стить повреждений защитного стекла дис-
плея – не кладите и не допускайте падения
посторонних предметов на защитное стекло.
ЦЕНТРАЛЬНЫЙ ДИСПЛЕЙ
Для очистки центрального дисплея исполь-
зуйте безворсовую ткань, не содержащую
любые виды твердых частиц. Очищайте цен-
тральный дисплей только, мягко нажимая на
дисплей. При сильном нажатии вы можете
повредить дисплей.
Не распыляйте непосредственно на цен-
тральный дисплей какие-либо жидкости или
коррозийные вещества. Не пользуйтесь
стеклоочистителями, чистящими веще-
ствами, аэрозолями, растворителями, спир-
тами, аммиаком или абразивными чистя-
щими веществами. Запрещается применять
шлифовальный материал, бумажные поло-
тенца или салфетки, так как они могут оста-
вить царапины на дисплее.
СКЛАДЫВАНИЕ СПИНКИ ЗАДНЕГО
СИДЕНЬЯ
Когда вы складываете спинку сиденья, на
заднем сидении не должны находиться
посторонние предметы. Ремни безопасности
также не должны быть пристегнуты.
Необходимо сложить подлокотник* среднего
места.
ПРАВЫЙ ПОДРУЛЕВОЙ РЫЧАГ
Щетки стеклоочистителей в сервисном
положении – Перед переводом щеток стек-
лоочистителей в сервисное положение убе-
дитесь, что они не приморожены. Если
рычаги очистителей отведены от ветрового
стекла и установлены в сервисное положе-
ние, то перед включением режима очистки,
омывания или датчика дождя, а также перед
началом поездки их необходимо вернуть
назад к ветровому стеклу. Это позволит
избежать царапин на краске капота.
ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЕ
Электрические гнезда – Максимальная
выходная мощность на каждом гнезде 12 В
составляет 120 Вт (10 А).
Максимальная выходная мощность гнезда
230 В составляет 150 Вт.
ВНИМАНИЕ
ВНЕШНИЕ ЭЛЕМЕНТЫ – ОБЗОР
Управление дверью багажника движе-
нием ноги – Если на заднем бампере ска-
пливается большое количество льда, снега,
грязи и т.п., существует риск, что функция
будет действовать с ограничениями или пол-
ностью отсутствовать. Поэтому содержите
бампер в чистоте.
Существует два варианта функции управле-
ния дверью багажника движением ноги:
• Открытие и закрытие движением ноги
• Только разблокирование движением ноги
(затем дверь багажника открывается вруч-
ную)
Обратите внимание, что для функции откры-
тия и закрытия движением ноги необходимо,
чтобы в автомобиле была установлена
дверь багажника с электроприводом*.
Помните, что если ключ находится в пред-
елах радиуса действия, система может акти-
вироваться во время мойки автомобиля или
в аналогичных ситуациях.
Программирование максимального
открытия – Если система длительное время
работает непрерывно, она отключается,
чтобы избежать перегрузки. Вы можете ей
вновь пользоваться, примерно, через
2 минуты.
Действие функций дистанционного ключа
могут нарушать электромагнитные поля и
помехи. Не храните дистанционный ключ
вблизи металлических предметов или элек-
тронных устройств, например, мобильных
телефонов, планшетов, ноутбуков и заряд-
ных устройств – желательно на расстоянии
не менее 10–15 см (4–6 дюймов).
ЭЛЕМЕНТЫ ИНТЕРЬЕРА – ОБЗОР
Режим вождения OFF ROAD не предназна-
чен для использования на дорогах общего
пользования.
При холодном запуске число оборотов на
холостом ходу для определенных типов дви-
гателей может быть значительно выше обы-
чного. Это сделано специально — для того,
чтобы система могла как можно быстрее
достичь нормальной рабочей температуры
при минимизации выбросов выхлопных газов
и ущерба для окружающей среды.
Проекционный дисплей* – При активирова-
нии функции City Safety информация на про-
екционном дисплее заменяется графикой
City Safety. Эта графика появляется даже,
если проекционный дисплей отключен.
Возможность водителя видеть информацию
на проекционном дисплее может ухуд-
шиться, например, в случае использования
поляризационных солнечных очков, если
водитель находится не в центре сиденья,
при наличии постороннего предмета на
защитном стекле дисплея и плохого качес-
тва освещения. При использовании проек-
ционного дисплея некоторые дефекты зре-
ния могут привести к появлению головной
боли и перенапряжению глаз.
РУЛЕВОЕ КОЛЕСО
Бортовой компьютер – При изменении
стиля вождения возможны некоторые
отклонения при расчете величины пробега.
КЛИМАТ В САЛОНЕ
Вы не сможете ускорить нагревание/охла-
ждение, выбрав температуру выше/ниже
оптимальной на текущий момент.
Подготовка климата – Во время подго-
товки климата в салоне двери и окна авто-
мобиля должны быть закрыты.
ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЕ
Модем автомобиля – Обратите внимание,
что SIM-карта, которая используется для
подключения к Интернету через P-SIM, не
может иметь тот же номер телефона, что и
SIM-карта телефона. Если это условие не
выполняется, вызовы не смогут правильно
поступать в телефон. Поэтому для подклю-
чения к Интернету используйте SIM-карту с
отдельным номером телефона или карту
данных, которая не обеспечивает телефон-
ные соединения и соответственно не может
помешать работе телефона.
06

Страница: 29

Интернет – При использовании Интернета
происходит обмен данными (трафик данных),
что может приводить к дополнительным
расходам. Активирование роуминга данных и
точек доступа Wi-Fi может приводить к
дополнительных расходам. Данные о стои-
мости трафика данных вы можете узнать у
вашего оператора сети. При загрузке с
помощью телефона особое внимание обрат-
ите на стоимость передачи данных.
Загрузка данных может повлиять на другие
услуги, связанные с передачей данных,
например, веб-радио. Загрузку можно пре-
рвать, если это мешает восприятию других
источников. Вы также можете отключить
или прервать трансляцию других источни-
ков. При загрузке с помощью телефона осо-
бое внимание обратите на стоимость пере-
дачи данных.
Обновление – Во время обновления опера-
ционной системы телефона подключение
Bluetooth может быть нарушено. В этом слу-
чае удалите телефон из автомобиля и затем
вновь выполните подключение.
ИСПОЛЬЗОВАНИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕННЫХ
УСТРОЙСТВ
Apple CarPlay и Android Auto – Volvo не
несет ответственности за содержание при-
ложения CarPlay или Android Auto.
Для использования Android Auto необхо-
димо, чтобы в автомобиле были установ-
лены два разъема USB (USB разветвитель)*.
В автомобиле только с одним разъемом USB
вы не сможете пользоваться Android Auto.
06

введение

Важная информация

6

*

Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение.

Читайте Руководство по
эксплуатации

Введение

Лучший способ познакомиться с Вашим
новым автомобилем — это прочитать
настоящее руководство, желательно до
первой поездки. Из руководства Вы можете
узнать о новых функциях, о том, как лучше
управлять автомобилем в различных ситуа-
циях и как наиболее эффективно использо-
вать различные свойства и возможности
автомобиля. Особое внимание уделяйте
приведенным в руководстве инструкциям по
безопасности.

Технические характеристики, особенности
конструкции и иллюстрации в настоящем
руководстве по эксплуатации не являются
обязательными. Мы сохраняем за собой
право вносить изменения без предвари-
тельного уведомления.

Volvo Car Corporation

Опция

Все типы опций/дополнительного оборудо-
вания обозначены звездочкой*.

Помимо стандартного оборудования в
настоящем руководстве по эксплуатации
описаны также опции (оборудование, уста-
навливаемое на заводе-изготовителе) и

некоторые аксессуары (дополнительное
оборудование, устанавливаемое позднее).

Оборудование, описанное в настоящем
руководстве по эксплуатации, установлено
не на всех автомобилях. Автомобили ком-
плектуются в зависимости от требований
различных рынков сбыта и национальных
или местных законов и правил.

Если вы не уверены в том, что входит в стан-
дартный или опционный/дополнительный
комплект поставки, обратитесь к дилеру
Volvo.

Специальные рубрики

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

Тексты под рубрикой «Предостереже-
ние» указывают на опасность получения
травм.

ВАЖНО

Тексты под рубрикой «Важно» свиде-
тельствуют об опасности повреждения
автомобиля.

ВНИМАНИЕ

В текстах под рубрикой «Внимание»
содержатся советы или рекомендации,
которые помогут Вам использовать раз-
личные свойства и функциональные воз-
можности автомобиля.

Сноска

В Руководстве по эксплуатации приводится
информация в виде сносок внизу страницы.
Эта информация дополняет текст, в кото-
ром указывается номер сноски. Для обозна-
чения сноски к тексту в таблице вместо
цифр используются буквы.

Тексты сообщений

В автомобиле установлены дисплеи, на
которых появляются текстовые сообщения.
Такие сообщения приведены в Руководстве
по эксплуатации более крупным шрифтом
серого цвета. Пример такого текста приво-
дится в текстах меню и сообщений на
информационном дисплее (например,

Настройки аудио

).

Таблички

В автомобиле имеются различные
таблички, в которых ясно и четко приво-
дится важная информация. Эти таблички в
автомобиле по нисходящей указывают сте-

введение

Важная информация

7

пень важности предупреждения/информа-
ции.

Предупреждение о возможных
травмах

G031590

Символы ISO черного цвета на желтом фоне
предупреждения, текст/рисунок белого
цвета на черном поле сообщения. Исполь-
зуются для указания об опасности, которая
в случае, если предупреждение игнори-
руется, может приводить к опасным или
смертельным травмам.

Повреждение имущества

G031592

Символы ISO белого цвета и текст/рисунок
белого цвета на черном или синем фоне пре-
дупреждения и сообщения. Используются
для указания об опасности, которая в слу-
чае если предупреждение игнорируется,
может приводить к повреждению имуще-
ства.

Информация

G031593

Символы ISO белого цвета и текст/рисунок
белого цвета на черном поле сообщения.

ВНИМАНИЕ

Приводимые в данном руководстве
таблички могут отличаться от табличек,
установленных в вашем автомобиле. На
иллюстрациях приводится лишь пример-
ное изображение табличек и указы-
вается их ориентировочное местополо-
жение в автомобиле. Конкретная инфор-
мация по вашему автомобилю приво-
дится в соответствующих табличках,
установленных на вашем автомобиле.

введение

Важная информация

8

Списки операций

В Руководстве по эксплуатации процедуры,
которые необходимо выполнять в опреде-
ленной последовательности, пронумеро-
ваны.

Если поэтапная инструкция оснащена
серией рисунков, то нумерация каждого
момента аналогична соответствующему
рисунку.

Серии рисунков сопровождаются про-
нумерованными списками с буквенными
обозначениями, в которых взаимный
порядок инструкций может отличаться.

Стрелки с цифрами и без цифр исполь-
зуются для наглядности перемещений.

Если к поэтапной инструкции отсутствует
серия из рисунков, то различные этапы обо-
значаются обычными цифрами.

Списки позиций

Для обозначения различных участков на
обзорных рисунках используются крас-
ные кружки с цифрой. Эта же цифра
приводится в списке позиций с описа-
нием объекта, соответствующего дан-
ному рисунку.

Маркированные списки

При перечислении в Руководстве по
эксплуатации используется маркированный
список.

Пример:

•

Охлаждающая жидкость

•

Масло для двигателя

Продолжение следует

«`

Если раздел продолжается на следую-

щем развороте, данный символ расположен
справа внизу.

Запись данных

В вашем автомобиле установлены
несколько компьютеров, которые непре-
рывно контролируют и проверяют работу
компонентов и действие функций. Некото-
рые из этих компьютеров могут регистриро-
вать информацию в нормальных условиях
эксплуатации, если они обнаруживают
ошибку. Кроме этого, информация реги-
стрируется во время столкновения или ава-
рии. Часть регистрируемой информации
требуется для того, чтобы при проведении
обслуживания и ремонта механики смогли
выполнить диагностику и устранить неис-
правности, а также для того, чтобы дей-
ствия компания Volvo соответствовали тре-
бованиям законодательства и других нор-
мативов. Кроме того, эта информация
используется компанией Volvo в исследова-
ниях, направленных на дальнейшее повы-
шение качества и безопасности, так как

позволяет более полно оценить обстоя-
тельства, которые приводят к авариям и
травмам людей. Эта информация включает
данные о состоянии и действии различных
систем и модулей автомобиля, в том числе
данные о состоянии двигателя, дроссель-
ной заслонки, рулевого управления, тормо-
зов и других систем. Эта информация может
содержать данные о манере управления
автомобилем, например, о скорости авто-
мобиля, использовании педали тормоза или
газа, углах поворота рулевого колеса, а
также о том использовали ли водитель и
пассажиры ремни безопасности. Такая
информация может по указанным причинам
храниться в компьютерах автомобиля в
течение определенного времени или как
следствие столкновения или аварии. Ком-
пания Volvo может хранить информацию
столько, сколько необходимо с целью даль-
нейшего совершенствования и повышения
безопасности и качества или столько вре-
мени, сколько требуется в соответствии с
законодательством или другими норматив-
ными документами, которые компания Volvo
должна принимать во внимание.

Компания Volvo не будет способствовать
разглашению этой сохраненной информа-
ции без вашего согласия. Однако компания
Volvo может быть вынуждена предоставить
данную информацию в соответствии с тре-

введение

Важная информация

*

Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение.

9

бованиями национального законодатель-
ства представителям властей, например,
полиции или другим организациям, имею-
щим право на получение данной информа-
ции.

Для считывания и анализа информации,
зарегистрированной в компьютерах авто-
мобиля, требуется специализированное
оборудование, которое имеется у компании
Volvo и в мастерских, связанных с компа-
нией договором. Компания Volvo несет
ответственность за то, чтобы информация,
получаемая компанией при проведении сер-
висных и ремонтных работ, хранилась и
обрабатывалась надежным способом в
соответствии с существующими требова-
ниями законодательства. За дополнитель-
ной информацией обращайтесь дилеру
Volvo.

Аксессуары и дополнительная
оснастка

Неправильное подсоединение или уста-
новка дополнительного оборудования могут
отрицательно повлиять на электронную
систему автомобиля. Некоторые аксес-
суары функционируют только при условии,
что соответствующее программное обеспе-
чение установлено в компьютерной системе
Вашего автомобиля. Поэтому перед уста-
новкой дополнительных принадлежностей,

подключаемых или влияющих на электриче-
скую систему автомобиля, Volvo рекомен-
дует обязательно обратиться на официаль-
ную станцию техобслуживания Volvo.

Смена владельца автомобиля с
функцией Volvo On Call*

Volvo On Call – это дополнительный пакет, в
который входят услуги по безопасности,
поддержке и повышенному комфорту. Если
у автомобиля, который подключен к услугам
Volvo On Call, происходит смена владельца,
очень важно прекратить действие этих
услуг с тем, чтобы предыдущий владелец не
мог ими пользоваться. Свяжитесь с центром
обслуживания, нажав в автомобиле кнопку
ON CALL, или обратитесь в официальную
мастерскую Volvo. См. также «Изменение
кода защиты» в руководстве по эксплуата-
ции Volvo On Call.

Лазерный датчик

На данном автомобиле установлен датчик
лазерного излучения. При обращении с
лазерным датчиком необходимо четко
выполнять предписанные инструкции.

Приведенные ниже две таблички на англий-
ском языке установлены непосредственно
на блоке лазерного датчика:

Верхняя табличка на рисунке определяет
класс лазерного излучения:

•

Лазерное излучение – Не смотрите на
поток лазерного излучения с использо-
ванием оптических приборов – Лазерная
продукция класса 1М.

На нижней табличке приводятся физиче-
ские параметры лазерного излучения:

•

IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Соответ-
ствует стандартам FDA (Управление по
санитарному надзору за пищевыми про-
дуктами и медикаментами, США) для
лазерной продукции за исключением
отличий согласно «Уведомлению по
лазерному излучению 50″ от
26 июля 2001 г..

введение

Важная информация

10

Параметры излучения лазерного
датчика

В таблице приводятся точные физические
параметры лазерного датчика.

Максимальная энергия
импульса

2,64 μДж

Максимальная средняя
выходная мощность

45 мВт

Ширина импульса

33 нс

Расходимость (по горизон-
тали х по вертикали)

28° × 12°

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ

Нарушение данных инструкций может
приводить к травме глаз!

•

Запрещается смотреть в лазерный
датчик (испускающий невидимые
лазерные лучи) с расстояния менее
100 мм с применением увеличиваю-
щей оптики, как например, лупы,
микроскопа, объектива или анало-
гичных оптических приборов.

•

Проверка, ремонт, демонтаж, регу-
лировка и/или замена деталей лазер-
ного датчика может проводиться
только уполномоченными мастер-
скими – мы рекомендуем обращаться
на официальные станции техобслу-
живания Volvo.

•

Чтобы избежать опасного облучения
не проводите процедуры регули-
ровки или обслуживания, не указан-
ные в данном руководстве.

•

При работе с лазерным датчиком
монтер должен следовать спе-
циально разработанной для этого
информации.

•

Не демонтируйте лазерный датчик
(включая линзы). Согласно стан-
дарту IEC 60825-1 снятый лазерный
датчик относится к лазерному
классу 3В. Лазерный класс 3В не

безопасен для глаз, и поэтому суще-
ствует опасность повреждения глаз.

•

Перед демонтажем лазерного дат-
чика с ветрового стекла необходимо
сначала отсоединить контакт.

•

Перед подсоединением контакта
необходимо сначала установить
лазерный датчик на ветровое
стекло.

•

Лазерный датчик испускает лазер-
ные лучи, когда дистанционный ключ
находится в положении II даже при
неработающем двигателе (положе-
ния ключа см. стр. 85).

Дополнительную информацию о лазерном
датчике см. стр. 205.

Информация в сети Интернет

На сайте www.volvocars.com можно найти
дополнительную информацию о вашем
автомобиле.

введение

Volvo и окружающая среда

11

Экологическая концепция Volvo Car Corporation

G000000

Забота об окружающей среде является
одним из основополагающих принципов
деятельности всех подразделений Volvo Car
Corporation. Мы также верим, что наши кли-
енты разделяют нашу заботу об окружаю-
щей среде.

Ваш автомобиль Volvo отвечает жестким
международным стандартам по охране
окружающей среды и, кроме того, изготав-
ливается на одном из самых экологически
чистых и ресурсосберегающих заводов в
мире. Volvo Car Corporation сертифицирован
согласно глобальному сертификату ISO,
включающему экологический стандарт ISO

14001, в соответствии с которым действуют
все наши заводы и большинство других
наших подразделений. Мы требуем также,
чтобы и наши партнеры систематически
занимались вопросами охраны окружающей
среды.

Расход топлива

Все автомобили Volvo конкурентоспособны
в отношении расхода топлива в соответ-
ствующих классах. Чем меньше расход топ-
лива, тем ниже в общем случае уровень
выбросов двуокиси углерода — газа, соз-
дающего парниковый эффект.

Расход топлива зависит от водителя. С
дополнительной информацией можно озна-
комиться в рубрике Охрана окружающей
среды, расположенной ниже.

Эффективная очистка отработавших
газов

Ваш автомобиль Volvo изготовлен в соот-
ветствии с концепцией «Чистота внутри и
снаружи» – концепция, которая предусмат-
ривает как чистую среду в салоне, так и
высокую степень очистки отработанных
газов. Во многих случаях уровень выбросов
отработанных газов намного ниже дей-
ствующих нормативов.

введение

Volvo и окружающая среда

12

*

Опция/дополнительное оборудование, дополнительную информацию см. Введение.

Чистый воздух в салоне

Фильтр в салоне препятствует проникнове-
нию в салон пыли и пыльцы через воздухо-
заборник.

Совершенная система контроля качества
воздуха IAQS* (Interior Air Quality System),
следит за тем, чтобы воздух, поступающий
в салон, был чище, чем снаружи в транс-
портном потоке.

Система состоит из электронного датчика и
угольного фильтра. Поступающий воздух
постоянно контролируется, и воздухоза-
борник закрывается при повышенном
содержании некоторых вредных для здоро-
вья газов, например, оксида углерода.
Подобная ситуация может встречаться,
например, в плотном транспортном потоке,
пробках или туннелях.

Угольный фильтр препятствует поступле-
нию оксидов азота, приповерхностного
озона и углеводородов.

Интерьер

В салоне Volvo создается уютная и приятная
атмосфера даже для страдающих контакт-
ной аллергией и астмой. Особое внимание
уделено выбору экологически безопасных
материалов.

Станции техобслуживания Volvo и
экология

Регулярное обслуживание создает условия
для увеличения срока службы автомобиля с
сохранением низкого расхода топлива. Это
способствует сохранению более чистой
окружающей среды. Ваш автомобиль стано-
вится частью нашей системы, если Вы дове-
ряете мастерским Volvo проводить сервис и
обслуживание автомобиля. Volvo уделяет
внимание организации помещений в наших
мастерских с целью предотвращения про-
ливов и выбросов в окружающую среду.
Персонал наших станций техобслуживания
обладает необходимыми знаниями и обору-
дованием, что гарантирует максимальную
экологическую безопасность.

Охрана окружающей среды

Вы можете внести свой вклад в охрану окру-
жающей среды – ниже вы найдете несколько
советов:

•

Не допускайте работы двигателя на
холостых оборотах – выключайте дви-
гатель при длительном ожидании.
Выполняйте местные предписания.

•

Экономичное вождение – означает
предвидение дорожной ситуации.

•

Выполняйте сервисные и профилакти-
ческие работы, как указано руководстве
по эксплуатации – соблюдайте интер-

валы, рекомендованные в книжке по
гарантии и сервису.

•

Если в автомобиле установлен предва-
рительный подогреватель двигателя*,
включайте его перед холодным запу-
ском – повышается способность холод-
ного старта и снижается износ в холод-
ную погоду, при этом двигатель быстрее
достигает нормальной рабочей темпе-
ратуры, что приводит к снижению рас-
хода топлива и уровня выбросов.

•

На высокой скорости значительно
повышается расход топлива в связи с
увеличением сопротивления воздуха –
при удвоении скорости сопротивление
воздуха увеличивается в 4 раза.

•

Утилизируйте опасные для окружающей
среды отходы, например, батарейки и
масло, экологически безопасным спосо-
бом. В случае сомнений проконсульти-
руйтесь в мастерской о способе утили-
зации таких отходов – мы рекомендуем
официальную станцию техобслужива-
ния Volvo.

Следуя этим советам, вы экономите деньги,
сохраняете ресурсы планеты и продлеваете
срок службы автомобиля. Детальную
информацию и ряд других советов можно
найти на стр. 306 и 400.

введение

Volvo и окружающая среда

13

Утилизация

Утилизация автомобиля по оптимальной
схеме с учетом экологических требований –
один из важных аспектов деятельности
Volvo по охране окружающей среды. Вос-
становлению подлежит практически весь
автомобиль. Поэтому мы просим послед-
него владельца автомобиля обратиться к
дилеру, который укажет организацию,
имеющую сертификат/разрешение на про-
ведение работ по утилизации.

Руководство по эксплуатации и
окружающая среда

Символ Forest Stewardship Council

Ÿ

указы-

вает на то, что источником бумажной массы,
использованной для публикации данного
издания, послужили леса, сертифицирован-
ные FSC

Ÿ

, или другие контролируемые

источники.

VLKOMMEN!

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your pas- sengers. Volvo strives to build one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental requirements.

To increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner’s manual.

The owner’s manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).

We encourage everyone to always wear their seatbelt in this and other cars. Please do not drive if you are under the influence of alcohol or medication or have an impaired ability to drive in some other way.

2

OWNER’S INFORMATION Owner information 16

Owner’s manual in centre display 17

Navigate in the owner’s manual in the centre display

18

Owner’s Manual in mobile devices 20

Volvo Cars support site 21

Reading the owner’s manual 21

The owner’s manual and the environment 23

YOUR VOLVO Volvo ID 26

Creating and registering a Volvo ID 26

Drive-E — cleaner driving pleasure 28

IntelliSafe driver support and safety 31

Sensus — online connectivity and entertainment

32

Software updates 35

Recording data 35

Terms & Conditions for Services 36

Customer Privacy Policy 36

Important information on accessories and auxiliary equipment

37

Installation of accessories 37

Connection of equipment to the car’s diagnostic socket

38

Showing the car’s identification number 39

Driver distraction 39

SAFETY Safety 42

Safety during pregnancy 42

Whiplash Protection System 43

Seatbelts 44

Putting on and taking off seatbelts 45

Seatbelt tensioner 46

Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner* 47

Door and seatbelt reminder 48

Airbags 49

Driver airbags 50

Passenger airbag 51

Activating and deactivating passen- ger airbag*

52

Side airbags 54

Inflatable curtains 55

Safety mode 56

Starting and moving the car after safety mode

56

Child safety 57

Child seats 58

Upper mounting points for child seats 59

Lower mounting points for child seats 59

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats

60

Child seat positioning 61

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3

Child seat mounting 62

Table for location of child seats using the car’s seatbelts

64

Table for location of i-Size child seats 66

Table for location of ISOFIX child seats 67

Integrated child seat* 70

Folding up the seat cushion in the integrated child seat*

71

Folding down the seat cushion in the integrated child seat*

72

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Instruments and controls in left-hand drive car

74

Instruments and controls in right- hand drive car

75

Driver display 77

Driver display settings 81

Fuel gauge 82

Trip computer 82

Show trip data in the driver display 84

Resetting the trip meter 85

Show trip statistics in the centre display 85

Settings for trip statistics 86

Date and time 87

Outside temperature gauge 87

Indicator symbols in the driver display 88

Warning symbols in the driver display 90

License agreement for the driver display 91

Application menu in driver display 97

Handling the application menu in the driver display

98

Messages in the driver display 99

Managing messages in the driver display 100

Handling a message saved from the driver display

102

Overview of centre display 103

Managing the centre display 106

Activating and deactivating centre display 109

Navigating in the centre display’s views 109

Managing subviews in centre display 113

Function view in centre display 116

Moving apps and buttons in centre display

118

Symbols in the centre display’s status bar 118

Keyboard in centre display 120

Changing keyboard language in cen- tre display

123

Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display

123

Changing the appearance in the centre display

125

Switching off and changing the vol- ume of the system sound in the cen- tre display

125

Changing system units 126

Changing system language 126

Other settings in the centre display’s top view

126

Open contextual setup in the centre display

127

Resetting user data for change of ownership

128

Resetting settings in the centre display 128

Table showing centre display settings 129

Driver profiles 130

4

Selecting driver profile 131

Renaming a driver profile 131

Protect driver profile 132

Linking remote control key to driver profile

132

Resetting settings in the driver profiles 133

Message in centre display 134

Managing messages in the centre display 134

Handling a message saved from the centre display

135

Head-up display* 136

Activating and deactivating the head- up display*

137

Settings for head-up display* 138

Voice recognition 139

Using voice recognition 140

Controlling a telephone with voice recognition

141

Voice control of radio and media 142

Settings for voice recognition 143

LIGHTING Lighting control 146

Adjusting light functions via the cen- tre display

147

Adjusting headlamp level 148

Position lamps 149

Daytime running lights 149

Dipped beam 150

Using main beam 151

Active main beam 151

Using direction indicators 153

Active bending lights* 154

Front fog lamps/cornering lights* 154

Rear fog lamp 155

Brake lights 156

Emergency brake lights 156

Hazard warning flashers 156

Using home safe lighting 157

Approach light duration 157

Interior lighting 158

Adjusting interior lighting 160

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Windows, glass and mirrors 162

Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds

162

Reset sequence for pinch protection 163

Power windows 163

Operating power windows 164

Rearview and door mirrors 165

Adjusting rearview mirror dimming 166

Angling the door mirrors 167

Panorama roof* 168

Operating the panorama roof* 169

Automatic closing of the panoramic roof’s* sun blind

171

Wiper blades and washer fluid 172

Using windscreen wipers 172

Using the rain sensor 173

Using the rain sensor’s memory function 174

Using windscreen and headlamp washers 175

Using the rear window wiper and washer 176

Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing

177

5

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Manual front seat 180

Power* front seat 181

Adjusting the power* front seat 181

Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display*

182

Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display*

183

Massage settings* in the front seat 184

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat

185

Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat

186

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat

187

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat

187

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver’s seat*

189

Lowering the backrests in the rear seat 190

Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat

192

Steering wheel controls and horn 194

Steering lock 195

Adjusting the steering wheel 195

CLIMATE Climate 198

Climate zones 198

Climate control — sensors 199

Perceived temperature 199

Controlling climate control with voice recognition

200

Air quality 201

Clean Zone* 201

Clean Zone Interior Package* 202

Interior Air Quality System* 202

Activating and deactivating the air quality sensor*

203

Passenger compartment filter 203

Air distribution 204

Changing air distribution 204

Opening, closing and aiming the air vents 205

Table of air distribution options 206

Climate controls 209

Activating and deactivating heated front seat*

211

Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated front seat*

212

Activating and deactivating heated rear seat*

212

Activating and deactivating ventilated front seat*

213

Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel*

214

Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated steering wheel*

214

Activating auto climate control 214

Activating and deactivating air recir- culation

215

Activating and deactivating time set- ting for air recirculation

216

Activating and deactivating max defroster 216

Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen*

217

Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated windscreen*

218

Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors

218

Activating and deactivating automatic starting of the heated rear window and door mirrors

219

Regulating fan level for front seat 219

Regulating fan level for rear seat* 220

Regulating temperature for front seat 221

Regulating temperature for rear seat* 222

Synchronising temperature 223

Activating and deactivating air condi- tioning

224

Parking climate* 224

Preconditioning* 225

6

Start and switch off preconditioning* 225

Preconditioning time setting* 226

Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning*

226

Activating and deactivating time set- ting for preconditioning*

228

Removing time setting for precondi- tioning*

228

Climate comfort when parking* 229

Starting and switching off climate comfort when parking*

229

Symbols and messages for parking climate control*

231

Heater* 232

Parking heater* 233

Additional heater* 234

Activating and deactivating automatic start of auxiliary heater*

234

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Lock confirmation 236

Lock indication setting 237

Remote control key 237

Locking and unlocking with the remote control key

239

Settings for remotely controlled and inside unlocking

240

Unlocking the tailgate with the remote control key

241

Remote control key range 241

Replacing the battery in the remote control key

242

Ordering more remote control keys 245

Red Key — restricted remote control key* 246

Settings for Red Key* 246

Detachable key blade 247

Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade

249

Immobiliser 250

Type approval for the remote control key system

251

Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* 260

Keyless locking and unlocking* 261

Settings for Keyless entry* 262

Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* 263

Antenna locations for the start and lock systems

263

Locking and unlocking from inside the car

264

Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of the car

265

Activating and deactivating child safety locks

266

Automatic locking when driving 267

Opening and closing the power*- operated tailgate

268

Programming maximum opening for power operated tailgate*

271

Opening and closing the tailgate with foot movement*

271

Private locking 273

Activating and deactivating private locking

274

Alarm* 275

Activating and deactivating alarms* 276

Reduced alarm level* 278

Double lock* 278

Temporarily* deactivating double locks 279

7

DRIVER SUPPORT Driving support systems 282

Speed-dependent steering force 282

Electronic stability control 283

Electronic Stability Control in sport mode 284

Activating/deactivating sport mode for Electronic Stability Control

285

Symbols and messages for elec- tronic stability control

286

Stability system 288

Speed limiter 288

Activating and starting the Speed Limiter 289

Deactivate the speed limiter and set it in standby mode

290

Reactivating the speed limiter from standby mode

290

Deactivating the speed limiter 291

Limitations for speed limiter 292

Automatic speed limiter 292

Activate/deactivate Automatic Speed Limiter

293

Changing the tolerance for the auto- matic speed limiter

294

Limitations for automatic speed limiter 295

Cruise control 295

Activating and starting Cruise Control 297

Deactivate cruise control and set it in standby mode

297

Reactivating cruise control from standby mode

298

Deactivating cruise control 299

Distance Warning* 300

Activating/deactivating Distance warning 301

Limitations of Distance Warning 301

Adaptive cruise control* 302

Controls and display view for adap- tive cruise control*

304

Activating and starting adaptive cruise control*

304

Deactivating/reactivating adaptive cruise control*

305

Limitations for adaptive cruise control* 307

Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control*

307

Symbols and messages for adaptive cruise control*

309

Pilot Assist 311

Controls and display view for Pilot Assist 313

Activating and starting Pilot Assist 314

Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist 315

Limitations of Pilot Assist 317

Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* 318

Warning from driver support in the event of a collision risk

320

Change of target with driver support 321

Set time interval for driver support 322

Drive mode for driver support 323

Set the stored speed for driver support 323

Automatic braking with driver support 324

Overtaking Assistance 325

Use Overtaking Assistance 326

Radar unit 327

Type approval for radar device 328

Camera unit 332

Limitations for camera and radar unit 333

Recommended maintenance for camera and radar unit

337

City Safety 338

Parameters and subfunctions for City Safety

339

Setting the warning distance for City Safety

341

Detection of obstacles with City Safety 342

City Safety in cross traffic 344

Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic 345

City Safety steering assistance for evasive manoeuvre

346

Limitations of City Safety steering assistance when taking evasive action

347

City Safety when evasive manoeu- vres are prevented

347

8

City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles 348

Limitations of City Safety 349

Messages for City Safety 352

Rear Collision Warning 353

Limitations of Rear Collision Warning 353

BLIS* 354

Activating or deactivating BLIS 355

Limitations of BLIS 356

Messages for BLIS 357

Cross Traffic Alert* 358

Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert 359

Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert 359

Messages for Cross Traffic Alert 361

Road Sign Information* 362

Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information*

363

Road Sign Information and sign display* 364

Road Sign Information and Sensus Navigation*

366

Road Sign Information with speed warning and settings*

366

Activating/deactivating Speed warn- ing in Road Sign Information

367

Road Sign Information with Speed Camera Information*

368

Limitations of Road Sign Information* 368

Driver Alert Control 369

Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control 370

Select rest stop guidance in the event of a warning from Driver Alert Control

371

Limitations of Driver Alert Control 371

Lane assistance 371

Steering assistance with lane assistance 373

Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid 373

Select assistance option for lane assistance

373

Limitations of Lane assistance 374

Symbols and messages for lane assistance

375

Lane assistance symbols in the driver display

377

Steering assistance at risk of collision 378

Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of a collision risk

379

Steering assistance level in the event of a run-off risk

379

Steering assistance upon risk of run-off 380

Steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision

381

Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end collision*

382

Limitations for steering assistance at risk of collision

383

Symbols and messages for steering assistance upon risk of collision

384

Park Assist* 385

Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the sides*

386

Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot* 387

Limitations of Parking assistance 388

Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot

389

Park assist camera* 390

Parking camera views* 391

Park assist lines for parking camera* 393

Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot for parking camera

395

Starting the park assist camera 396

Symbols and messages for Park assist camera

397

Park Assist Pilot* 398

Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot* 399

Parking with Park Assist Pilot* 400

Leaving parallel parking with Park Assist Pilot*

402

Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* 403

Messages for Park Assist Pilot* 406

9

STARTING AND DRIVING Starting the car 408

Switching off the car 409

Ignition positions 410

Selecting ignition mode 411

Alcohol lock* 412

Bypass of the alcohol lock* 412

Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock

413

Brake functions 413

Foot brake 413

Brake assistance 414

Braking on wet roads 415

Braking on gritted roads 415

Brake system maintenance 415

Parking brake 416

Activating and deactivating the park- ing brake

416

Automatic parking brake activation setting

418

Parking on a hill 418

In the event of a fault in the parking brake

418

Automatic braking when stationary 419

Activating and deactivating the auto- matic brake at a standstill

420

Help when starting on a hill 420

Auto braking after a collision 421

Gearbox 421

Manual gearbox 422

Gear positions for automatic gearbox 423

Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*

424

Gear selector inhibitor 426

Deactivate automatic gear selector inhibitor

426

Kick-down function 427

Gear shift indicator 427

All-wheel drive* 429

Drive modes* 429

Changing drive mode* 431

Drive mode Eco 432

Activating and deactivating drive mode Eco with the function button

434

Start/stop function 434

Driving with start/stop function 435

Temporarily switching off the start/ stop function

436

Conditions for the Start/Stop function 437

Level control* and shock absorption 439

Settings for level control* 442

Low speed control* 442

Activating and deactivating low- speed driving* using a function button

443

Hill descent control* 444

Activating and deactivating hill descent control* with the function button

445

Economical driving 445

Preparations for a long trip 446

Winter driving 447

Driving in water 448

Opening and closing the fuel filler flap 448

Filling fuel 449

Handling of fuel 450

Petrol 451

Petrol particle filter 452

Diesel 452

Empty tank and diesel engine 454

Diesel particulate filter 454

Emission control with AdBlue 455

Handling AdBlue 456

Checking and filling with AdBlue 456

Symbols and messages for AdBlue 459

Overheating in the engine and drive system

461

Overloading the starter battery 462

Using jump starting with another battery 462

10

Towbar* 464

Specifications for towbar* 464

Extendable and retractable towbar* 465

Driving with a trailer 467

Trailer stability assist* 469

Checking trailer lamps 470

Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* 471

Towing 472

Fitting and removing the towing eye 473

Recovery 474

HomeLink* 475

Programming HomeLink* 476

Using HomeLink* 478

Type approval for HomeLink* 478

Compass* 479

Activating and deactivating the compass* 479

Calibrating the compass* 479

SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Sound, media and Internet 482

Audio settings 482

Sound experience* 483

Apps 484

Downloading apps 485

Updating apps 486

Deleting apps 486

Radio 487

Start radio 487

Changing radio band and radio station 488

Searching for radio stations 489

Setting radio favourites 489

Settings for radio 490

RDS radio 491

Digital radio* 492

Link between FM and digital radio* 493

Media player 493

Media playback 494

Controlling and changing media 495

Searching media 496

Gracenote 497

CD player* 497

Video 498

Playing a video 498

Playing back DivX 498

Settings for video 499

Media via Bluetooth 499

Connecting a device via Bluetooth 499

Media via USB port 500

Connecting a device via USB port 500

Technical specifications for USB devices 501

Compatible media formats 501

Apple CarPlay* 502

Using Apple CarPlay* 503

Settings for Apple CarPlay* 504

Tips for using Apple CarPlay* 505

Android Auto* 506

Using Android Auto* 506

Settings for Android Auto* 507

Tips for using Android Auto* 508

Phone 508

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time

509

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically

511

Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually

512

Disconnecting a Bluetooth-con- nected phone

512

11

Switch between Bluetooth-con- nected phones

512

Removing devices connected to Bluetooth

513

Managing phone calls 513

Managing text messages 514

Settings for text messages 515

Managing the phone book 515

Settings for phone 516

Settings for Bluetooth devices 517

Internet-connected car* 517

Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone

518

Connect the car to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi)

519

Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card)

519

Settings for car modem* 520

Sharing Internet access from the car via a Wi-Fi hotspot

521

No or poor Internet connection 522

Remove Wi-Fi network 522

Wi-Fi technologies and security 523

User terms and conditions and data sharing

523

Activating and deactivating data sharing 523

Storage space on hard disk 524

License agreement for audio and media 525

WHEELS AND TYRES Tyres 536

Dimension designation for tyre 537

Dimension designation for wheel rim 538

Tyres’ rotation direction 539

Tread wear indicators on the tyres 539

Checking tyre pressure 540

Adjusting tyre pressure 540

Recommended tyre pressure 541

Tyre pressure monitoring system* 542

Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system*

543

See tyre pressure status in the cen- tre display*

545

Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure

546

When changing wheels 547

Tool kit 547

Jack* 547

Wheel bolts 548

Removing a wheel 549

Fitting the wheels 551

Spare wheel* 552

Handling the spare wheel 553

Winter tyres 554

Snow chains 554

12

Emergency puncture repair kit 555

Using a puncture repair kit 556

Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit

560

LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Passenger compartment interior 562

Tunnel console 563

Electrical sockets 564

Using electrical sockets 566

Using the glovebox 567

Sun visors 569

Cargo area 569

Recommendations for loading 569

Roof load and loading on load carriers 571

Bag hooks 571

Load retaining eyelets 572

Through-load hatch in the rear seat 572

Fitting and removing cargo cover* 573

Operating cargo cover* 575

Fitting and removing safety grilles* 576

Fitting and removing the safety net* 577

First aid kit* 579

Warning triangle 579

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Volvo service programme 582

Data transfer between car and work- shop via Wi-Fi

582

Download Center 583

Managing system updates via the Download Centre

583

Car status 584

Book service and repair 585

Sending car information to a workshop 586

Raise the car 587

Servicing the climate control system 589

Head up display when replacing the windscreen*

589

Opening and closing the bonnet 590

Engine compartment overview 591

Engine oil 592

Checking and filling with engine oil 593

Topping up coolant 594

Bulb replacement 596

Exterior lamp positions 596

Replacing the dipped beam bulb 597

Replacing the main beam lamp 598

Replacing daytime running light bulb/position lamp bulb, front

598

Replacing the front direction indica- tor bulb

599

13

Bulb specifications 599

Starter battery 600

Support battery 603

Symbols on the batteries 604

Battery recycle 605

Fuses and central electrical units 605

Replacing a fuse 606

Fuses in engine compartment 607

Fuses under glovebox 610

Fuses in cargo area 613

Cleaning the interior 617

Cleaning the centre display 617

Cleaning the head up display* 618

Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining 619

Cleaning the seatbelts 619

Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats 619

Cleaning leather upholstery 620

Cleaning the leather steering wheel 621

Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts

621

Cleaning the exterior 622

Polishing and waxing 622

Handwashing 623

Automatic car wash 624

High-pressure washing 625

Cleaning the wiper blades 625

Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components

626

Cleaning wheel rims 627

Rustproofing 627

Car paintwork 628

Touching up minor paintwork damage 628

Colour codes 629

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window 630

Replacing windscreen wiper blades 631

Wiper blades in service position 632

Filling washer fluid 633

SPECIFICATIONS Type designations 636

Dimensions 639

Weights 641

Towing capacity and towball load 642

Engine specifications 644

Engine oil specifications 645

Adverse driving conditions for engine oil 647

Coolant specifications 648

Transmission fluid specifications 648

Brake fluid specifications 648

Fuel tank — volume 649

Tank capacity for AdBlue 649

Air conditioning specifications 649

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions 651

Approved wheel and tyre sizes 655

Minimum permitted tyre load index and speed rating for tyres

657

Approved tyre pressures 659

14

ALPHABETICAL INDEX Alphabetical Index 661

OWNER’S INFORMATION

16

Owner information Owner’s information is available in several differ- ent product formats, both digital and printed. The owner’s manual is available in the car’s cen- tre display, as a mobile app and on the Volvo Cars support site. There is a Quick Guide and a supplement to the owner’s manual available in the glovebox, with specifications and fuse infor- mation, amongst other things. A printed owner’s manual can be ordered.

The car’s centre display1

In the centre display, drag down the top view and tap on Owner’s manual. Available here are options for visual navi- gation with exterior and interior images of the car. The informa- tion is searchable and is also

divided into categories.

Mobile app In App Store or Google Play, search for «Volvo Manual», download the app to your smartphone or tablet and select the car. Available in the app are video tutorials and options for visual navigation with exterior

and interior images of the car. It is easy to navi- gate between the different sections in the owner’s manual and the content is searchable.

Volvo Cars support site Go to support.volvocars.com and select your country. Here you can find owner’s manuals, both online and in PDF format. On the Volvo Cars support site there are also video tutorials and further information and

help regarding your Volvo and your car owner- ship. The page is available for most markets.

Printed information There is a supplement to the owner’s manual1 in the glove- box that contains information on fuses and specifications, as well as a summary of important and practical information.

There is also a Quick Guide available in printed format that helps you to get started with the most commonly used functions in the car.

Depending on equipment level selected, market, etc. additional owner’s information may also be available in printed format in the car.

A printed owner’s manual and associated supple- ment can be ordered. Contact a Volvo dealer to order.

IMPORTANT

The driver is always responsible that the vehi- cle is driven safely in traffic and that applica- ble laws and regulations are followed. It is also important that the car is maintained and handled in accordance with Volvo’s recom- mendations in the owner’s information.

If there should be a difference between the information in the centre display and the prin- ted information then it is always the printed information that applies.

1 A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner’s manual in the centre display.

OWNER’S INFORMATION

}}

17

NOTE

Changing the language in the centre display may mean that some owner’s information is not compliant with national or local laws and regulations. Do not switch to a language that is difficult to understand as this may make it difficult to find your way back through the screen structure.

Related information Owner’s manual in centre display (p. 17)

Owner’s Manual in mobile devices (p. 20)

Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)

Reading the owner’s manual (p. 21)

Owner’s manual in centre display A digital2 version of the owner’s manual is availa- ble in the car’s centre display.

The digital owner’s manual can be accessed from the top view, and in some cases the contextual owner’s manual can also be accessed from the top view.

NOTE

The digital owner’s manual is not available while driving.

Owner’s manual

Top view with button for owner’s manual.

To open the owner’s manual — drag down the top view in the centre display and tap on Owner’s manual.

The information in the owner’s manual can be accessed directly via the owner’s manual home- page or its top menu.

2 Applies for most markets.

||

OWNER’S INFORMATION

18

Contextual owner’s manual

Top view with button for contextual owner’s manual.

The contextual owner’s manual is a shortcut to an article in the owner’s manual that describes the active function shown on the screen. When the contextual owner’s manual is available, it is shown to the right of Owner’s manual in the top view.

Tapping on the contextual owner’s manual there- fore opens an article in the owner’s manual that is related to the content that is shown on the screen. E.g. tap on Navigation Manual an arti- cle that is related to navigation opens.

This only applies to some of the apps in the car. For downloaded third party apps, for example, it is not possible to access app-specific articles.

Related information Navigate in the owner’s manual in the centre

display (p. 18)

Navigating in the centre display’s views (p. 109)

Downloading apps (p. 485)

Navigate in the owner’s manual in the centre display The digital owner’s manual can be accessed from the centre display top view in the car. The content is searchable and it is easy to navigate between different sections.

The owner’s manual is accessed from the top view.

To open the owner’s manual — drag down the top view in the centre display and tap on Owner’s manual.

There is a range of different options for finding information in the owner’s manual. The options can be accessed from the owner’s manual home- page and from the top menu.

OWNER’S INFORMATION

}}

19

Opening the menu in the top menu Press in the upper list in the owner’s

manual.

> A menu with different options for finding information is opened:

Homepage Tap on the symbol to go back to the start page in the owner’s manual.

Categories The articles in the owner’s manual are structured into main categories and subcate- gories. The same article can be found in several appropriate categories so that it can be found more easily.

1. Press Categories.

> The main categories are shown in a list.

2. Tap on a main category ( ).

> A list of subcategories ( ) and articles

( ) is shown.

3. Tap on an article to open it.

To go back, press the back arrow.

Quick Guide Press the symbol to access a page with links to a selection of articles that can be particularly useful to read in order to get to know the most common func- tions of the car. The articles can also be accessed via cate-

gories, but are collected here for quick access. Tap on an article in order to read it in its entirety.

Hotspots for exterior and interior Exterior and interior overview images of the car. Different parts are designated with hot- spots that lead to articles about those parts of the car.

1. Press Exterior or Interior.

> Exterior or interior images are shown with so-called hotspots in place. The hotspot leads to articles about the corresponding part of the car. Swipe horizontally over the screen to browse among the images.

2. Tap on a hotspot.

> The title of the article about the area is shown.

3. Tap on the title to open the article.

To go back, press the back arrow.

Favourites Press the symbol to access the articles saved as favourites. Tap on an article in order to read it in its entirety.

Saving or deleting articles as favourites

Save an article as favourite by pressing at the top right when an article is open. When an article has been saved as a favourite the star is filled in:

.

To remove an article as a favourite, press the star again in the current article.

Video Press the symbol to view brief instruction videos for various functions in the car.

||

OWNER’S INFORMATION

20

Information Tap on the symbol to obtain information about which version of the owner’s manual is availa- ble in the car as well as other useful information.

Using the search function in the top menu

1. Tap on in the top menu of the owner’s manual. A keyboard appears in the lower part of the screen.

2. Type in a keyword, such as «seatbelt».

> Suggestions for articles and categories are shown while letters are being entered.

3. Tap on the article or category to access it.

Related information Owner’s manual in centre display (p. 17)

Keyboard in centre display (p. 120)

Reading the owner’s manual (p. 21)

Owner’s Manual in mobile devices The owner’s manual is available as a mobile

app3 from both the App Store and Google Play. The app is adapted for smartphones and tablets.

The owner’s manual can be downloaded as a mobile app from the App Store or Google Play. The QR code provided here takes you directly to the app. Alternatively, you can search for «Volvo manual» in

the App Store or Google Play.

The app contains a video along with exterior and interior images where different parts of the car are highlighted with so-called hotspots, which lead to articles about the area in question. It is easy to navigate between the different sections

in the owner’s manual and the content is search- able.

The mobile app is available from both the App Store and Google Play.

Related information Reading the owner’s manual (p. 21)

3 For certain mobile devices.

OWNER’S INFORMATION

}}

* Option/accessory. 21

Volvo Cars support site More information on your car is available on the Volvo Cars website and support site.

Support on the Internet Go to support.volvocars.com to visit the site. The support site is available for most markets.

It contains support for functions such as web- based services and functions, Volvo On Call*, the navigation system* and apps. Videos and step- by-step instructions explain different procedures, e.g. how to connect the car to the Internet via a mobile phone.

Downloadable information

Maps For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation there is the facility to download maps from the support page.

Owner’s manuals as PDF Owner’s manuals are available for download in PDF format. Select car model and model year to download the manual as required.

Contact The support site contains contact details to cus- tomer support and your nearest Volvo retailer.

Log in to Volvo Cars website Create a personal Volvo ID and log in to www.volvocars.com. When you have logged in it is possible to get an overview of service, agree-

ments and warranties, amongst other things. Here there is also information about accessories and software adapted for your car model.

Related information Volvo ID (p. 26)

Reading the owner’s manual A good way of getting to know your new car is to read the owner’s manual, ideally before your first journey.

Reading the owner’s manual is a good way to become familiar with new functions, get advice on how best to handle the car in different situa- tions and learn how to make the best use of all the car’s features. Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the owner’s man- ual.

The intention of this owner’s information is to explain all possible functions, options and acces- sories included in a Volvo vehicle. It is not intended as an indication or guarantee that all of these features, functions and options are included in every vehicle. Some terminology used may not exactly match terminology used in sales, marketing and advertising materials.

Development work is constantly underway in order to improve our product. Modifications may mean that information, descriptions and illustra- tions in the owner’s manual differ from the equip- ment in the car. We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice.

Do not remove this manual from the car — if prob- lems should arise then the necessary information about where and how to seek professional help will be missing.

Volvo Car Corporation

||

OWNER’S INFORMATION

* Option/accessory.22

Options/accessories In addition to standard equipment, the owner’s manual also describes options (factory fitted equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment).

All, at the time of publication known, options and accessories are marked with an asterisk: *.

The equipment described in the owner’s manual is not available in all cars — they have different equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations.

In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.

Special texts

WARNING

Warning texts appear if there is a risk of injury.

IMPORTANT

«Important» texts appear if there is a risk of damage.

NOTE

NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of e.g. features and functions.

Decals The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the car have the following descending degree of impor- tance for the warning/information.

Warning of personal injury

Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white text/image on black message field. Used to indi- cate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or fatality.

Risk of property damage

White ISO symbols and white text/image on black or blue warning field and message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in damage to property.

OWNER’S INFORMATION

23

Information

White ISO symbols and white text/image on black message field.

NOTE

It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner’s manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your particular car is available on the respective decals for your car.

Illustrations and video clips Illustrations and video clips used in the owner’s manual are sometimes schematic and are intended to provide an overall picture or example of a certain function. They may deviate from the

car’s appearance depending on equipment level and market.

Related information Owner’s manual in centre display (p. 17)

Owner’s Manual in mobile devices (p. 20)

Volvo Cars support site (p. 21)

The owner’s manual and the environment The Owner’s Manual is printed on paper origi- nating from controlled forests.

The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) symbol shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner’s manual comes from FSC-certified forests or other controlled sources.

Related information Drive-E — cleaner driving pleasure (p. 28)

YOUR VOLVO

* Option/accessory.26

Volvo ID Volvo ID is a personal ID that gives access to a wide range of services via a single username and password.

NOTE

The services available may vary over time and depend on equipment level and market.

Examples of services:

Volvo On Call app* check the car with your phone. For example, you can check fuel level, show the nearest petrol station and lock the car remotely.

Send to Car send addresses from map services on the Web, directly to the car.

Book service and repair register your pre- ferred workshop/dealer on volvocars.com and book service directly from the car.

NOTE

If the username/password for a service (e.g. Volvo On Call) is changed, then it is also changed automatically for other services.

Volvo ID is created from the car, volvocars.com or the Volvo On Call app1.

When a Volvo ID is registered in the car, several services will be made available. Several Volvo IDs can be used for the same car and several cars can even be connected to the same Volvo ID.

Related information Creating and registering a Volvo ID (p. 26)

Book service and repair (p. 585)

Creating and registering a Volvo ID It is possible to create a Volvo ID in different ways. If the Volvo ID is created at volvocars.com

or with Volvo On Call app2, the Volvo ID must also be registered to the car to enable use of the various Volvo ID services.

Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo ID app 1. Download the Volvo ID app from Download

Centre in the centre display’s app view.

2. Start the app and register a personal email address.

3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address.

> A Volvo ID has now been created and automatically registered to the car. Volvo ID services can now be used.

1 If you have Volvo On Call*. 2 Only applies to certain markets.

YOUR VOLVO

* Option/accessory. 27

Create a Volvo ID on the Volvo Cars website

1. Go into www.volvocars.com and log in3 using the icon at the top right. Select Create Volvo ID.

2. Enter a personal email address.

3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address.

> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read below to learn how to register the ID to the car.

Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo On Call

app4

1. Download the latest version of the Volvo On Call app from a smartphone, via e.g. App Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.

2. Choose to create a Volvo ID from the app’s start page and enter a personal email address.

3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address.

> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read below to learn how to register the ID to the car.

Registering your Volvo ID to the car If you created your Volvo ID via the web or the Volvo On Call app, register it to your car as fol- lows:

1. If not done already, download the Volvo ID app from Download Centre in the centre display’s app view.

NOTE

To download apps, the car must be con- nected to the Internet.

2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your email address.

3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the email address linked to your Volvo ID.

> Your Volvo ID is now registered to the car. Volvo ID services can now be used.

Related information Volvo ID (p. 26)

Downloading apps (p. 485)

Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 583)

Internet-connected car* (p. 517)

3 Available on certain markets. 4 Cars with Volvo On Call*.

YOUR VOLVO

28

Drive-E — cleaner driving pleasure Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on the development of safer and more efficient

products and solutions in order to reduce the negative impact on the environment.

Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars core val- ues and influences all operations. The environ- mental work is based on the whole life cycle of the car and takes into account the environmental impact it has, from design to scrapping and recy- cling. Volvo Cars’ basic principle is that every new product developed must have less impact on the environment than the product it replaces.

Volvo’s environmental management work has resulted in the development of more effective and less polluting drivelines Drive-E. Personal environment is also important to Volvo — the air

inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air outside thanks to the climate control system.

Your Volvo complies with stringent international environmental standards. All Volvo’s manufactur- ing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this supports a systematic approach to the opera- tion’s environmental issues, which leads to con- tinuous improvement with reduced environmental impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means that environmental laws and regulations in force are complied with. Volvo also requires that its partners must also meet these requirements.

Fuel consumption Since a large part of a car’s total environmental impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo Cars’ environmental work is on reducing fuel con- sumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel con- sumption in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.

YOUR VOLVO

}}

* Option/accessory. 29

Contributing to a better environment An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only contributes to a reduced impact on the environ- ment, but also means reduced costs for the owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to reduce fuel consumption and thereby save money and contribute to a better environment — here is some advice:

Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds above approx. 80 km/h (approx. 50 mph) and below 50 km/h (approx. 30 mph) lead to increased energy consumption.

Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet’s recommended intervals for service and main- tenance of the car.

Avoid letting the engine idle — switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods. Pay attention to local regulations.

Plan the journey — a lot of unnecessary stops and uneven speed contribute to increased fuel consumption.

Use preconditioning* before starting in cold conditions — it improves starting capacity and reduces wear in cold weather. The engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly, which decreases consumption and reduces emissions.

Also remember to always dispose of environmen- tally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in an environmentally safe manner. Consult a work- shop in the event of uncertainty about how this

type of waste should be discarded — an author- ised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept «Clean inside and out» a concept that encom- passes a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control. In many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applica- ble standards.

Clean air in the passenger compartment An air filter helps prevent dust and pollen enter- ing the passenger compartment via the air intake.

The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic outside.

The system cleans the air in the passenger com- partment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed and the air is recirculated. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for example.

IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Pack- age (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked with the remote control key.

Interior The material used in the interior of a Volvo is carefully selected and has been tested in order to be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details are hand-made, such as the seams of the steer- ing wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is monitored in order not to emit strong odours or substances that cause discomfort in the event of e.g. high heat and bright light.

Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you also contribute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo’s workshops are entrusted with the service and maintenance of your car it becomes part of Volvo’s system. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in which workshop premises shall be designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment. The workshop staff have the knowl- edge and the tools required to guarantee good environmental care.

Recycling Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it is also important that the car is recycled in an environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is therefore requested to contact a retailer for refer- ral to a certified/approved recycling facility.

||

YOUR VOLVO

* Option/accessory.30

Related information Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions

(p. 651)

Economical driving (p. 445)

Start and switch off preconditioning* (p. 225)

The owner’s manual and the environment (p. 23)

Air quality (p. 201)

YOUR VOLVO

* Option/accessory. 31

IntelliSafe driver support and safety IntelliSafe is the Volvo Cars concept for car safety. IntelliSafe comprises a number of sys-

tems5, whose purpose is to make a car journey safer, to prevent injuries and to protect passen- gers and other road users.

WARNING

The functions are supplementary aids — they cannot handle all situations in all conditions.

The driver always bears responsibility that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable road traffic rules and regulations are followed.

Support With the aim of assisting the driver to drive the car in a safer way, IntelliSafe has the following functions.

Active main beam

Tunnel detection

Pilot Assist

Cross Traffic Alert

Blind Spot Information

Park Assist*

Park Assist Pilot*

Park assist camera*

Road Sign Information*

Electronic stability control

Roll Stability Control

Speed limiter*

Cruise control

Adaptive cruise control*

Rear Collision Warning

Driver Alert Control

All-wheel drive6

Prevention With the aim of assisting the driver to avoid an accident, IntelliSafe has the following functions.

City Safety

Distance Warning*

Lane assistance

Collision Avoid. Assistance

Protection With the aim of protecting the driver and passen- gers in certain situations in the event of an acci- dent, IntelliSafe has the following collaborative functions.

Whiplash Protection System

Seatbelts with seatbelt tensioners

Airbags

NOTE

Read the individual sections on each system in order to fully understand the functions and learn about important warnings.

Related information Active main beam (p. 151)

Safety (p. 42)

Driving support systems (p. 282)

5 Some of the systems are fitted as standard, while others are options. This may vary depending on market, model year and car model. 6 All Wheel Drive

YOUR VOLVO

* Option/accessory.32

Sensus — online connectivity and entertainment Sensus makes it possible to use different types of apps and turn the car into a Wi-Fi hotspot.

This is Sensus

Sensus offers an intelligent interface and online connectivity with the digital world. An intuitive navigation structure makes it possible to receive relevant support, information and entertainment when it is necessary, without distracting the driver.

Sensus covers all solutions in the car that are connected with entertainment, online connectiv- ity, navigation* and the user interface between driver and car. It is Sensus that makes communi- cation possible between you, the car and the out- side world.

Information when it is needed, where it is needed The different displays in the car provide informa- tion at the right time. The information is shown in different locations based on how it should be pri- oritised by the driver.

YOUR VOLVO

}}

* Option/accessory. 33

Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritised.

Head-up display*

The head-up display shows selected information that the driver should deal with as soon as possi- ble. Such information may, for example, include

traffic warnings, speed information and naviga- tion* information. Road Sign Information and incoming phone calls are also shown in the head- up display. The display is operated via the right- hand steering wheel keypad and via the centre display.

Driver display

12-inch* driver display.

||

YOUR VOLVO

* Option/accessory.34

8-inch driver display.

The driver display shows information on speed and e.g. incoming calls or song tracks being played. The display is operated via the two steer- ing wheel keypads.

Centre display

Many of the main functions of the car are con- trolled from the centre display, a touch screen which reacts to touch. The number of physical buttons and controls in the car is therefore mini- mal. The screen can even be operated while wearing gloves.

From here, for example, you can control the cli- mate control system, the entertainment system and seat position*. The information that is shown in the centre display can be acted on by the driver or someone else in the car when the opportunity arises.

Voice recognition system The voice recognition system can be used without the driver needing to take his/her hands off the steering wheel. The sys- tem can understand natural speech. Use voice recognition to, for example, play back a

song, call someone, increase the temperature or read out a text message.

Related information Head-up display* (p. 136)

Driver display (p. 77)

Overview of centre display (p. 103)

Voice recognition (p. 139)

Internet-connected car* (p. 517)

Sharing Internet access from the car via a Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 521)

YOUR VOLVO

}}

35

Software updates So that you as a Volvo customer get the best experience of your car, Volvo continuously devel- ops the systems in the cars and the services that you are offered.

You can update the software in your Volvo to the latest version when your car is serviced at an authorised Volvo dealer. The latest software update allows you to benefit from available improvements, including improvements from ear- lier software updates.

For more information about released updates and answers to frequently asked questions, please go to support.volvocars.com.

NOTE

Functionality after updating may vary depend- ing on market, model, model year and options.

Related information Sensus — online connectivity and entertain-

ment (p. 32)

Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 583)

Recording data As part of Volvo’s safety and quality assurance, certain information about the vehicle’s operation, functionality and incidents are recorded in the car.

This vehicle is equipped with an «Event Data Recorder» (EDR). Its primary purpose is to regis- ter and record data related to traffic accidents or collision-like situations, such as times when the airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle in the road. The data is recorded in order to increase understanding of how vehicle systems work in these types of situations. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short time, usually 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record data related to the following in the event of traffic accidents or collision-like situations:

How the various systems in the car worked

Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts were fastened/tensioned

The driver’s use of the accelerator or brake pedal

The travel speed of the vehicle

This information can help us better understand the circumstances in which traffic accidents, inju- ries and damage occur. The EDR only records data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs. The EDR does not record any data during normal

driving conditions. Similarly, the system never registers who is driving the vehicle or the geo- graphic location of the accident or near-miss sit- uation. However, other parties, such as the police, could use the recorded data in combination with the type of personally identifiable information routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special equipment and access to either the vehicle or the EDR is required to be able to interpret the regis- tered data.

In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a number of computers designed to continually check and monitor the function of the car. They can record data during normal driving conditions, but in particular register faults affecting the vehi- cle’s operation and functionality, or upon activa- tion of the vehicle’s driver support function (e.g. City Safety and the auto brake function).

Some of the recorded data is required to enable service and maintenance technicians to diagnose and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehi- cle. The registered information is also needed to enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out in laws and by government authorities. Informa- tion registered in the vehicle is stored in its com- puter until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.

In addition to the above, the registered informa- tion can be used in aggregate form for research and product development with the aim of contin- uously improving the safety and quality of Volvo cars.

YOUR VOLVO

36

Volvo will not contribute to the above-described information being disclosed to third parties with- out the vehicle owner’s consent. To comply with national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be forced to disclose information of this nature to the police or other authorities who may assert a legal right to access such. Special technical equipment which Volvo and workshops that have entered into agreements with Volvo have access to is required to be able to read and interpret the recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the infor- mation, which is transferred to Volvo during serv- icing and maintenance, is securely stored and managed and that its management complies with relevant legal requirements. For further informa- tion — contact a Volvo retailer.

Terms & Conditions for Services Volvo offers services so that you can drive your Volvo as safely and as comfortably as possible.

These services include everything from assis- tance in emergencies to navigation and various maintenance services.

Before using the services, it is important for you to read the Terms & Conditions for Services at support.volvocars.com.

Related information Customer Privacy Policy (p. 36)

Customer Privacy Policy Volvo respects and safeguards the personal integrity of everyone visiting our website.

This policy regards to the handling of customer data and personal information. The purpose is to give current, past and potential customers a gen- eral understanding of:

The circumstances in which we gather and process your personal data.

The types of personal data we gather.

The reason we gather your personal data.

How we handle your personal data.

This policy can be read in its entirety at support.volvocars.com.

Related information User terms and conditions and data sharing

(p. 523)

Terms & Conditions for Services (p. 36)

Recording data (p. 35)

YOUR VOLVO

}}

37

Important information on accessories and auxiliary equipment The incorrect connection and installation of accessories and extra equipment can negatively affect the car’s electronic system.

We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when associ- ated software is installed in the car’s computer system.

The equipment described in the owner’s manual is not available in all cars — they have different equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations.

Options or accessories described in this manual are marked with an asterisk. In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/ accessory, contact a Volvo retailer.

WARNING

The driver always bears the ultimate responsi- bility that the car is used safely and that laws and regulations in force are followed.

It is also important that the car has mainte- nance and service according to Volvo’s rec- ommendations, the owner’s information and the service and warranty booklet.

If the on-board information differs from the printed owner’s manual then the printed infor- mation always has precedence.

Related information Installation of accessories (p. 37)

Connection of equipment to the car’s diag- nostic socket (p. 38)

Reading the owner’s manual (p. 21)

Installation of accessories We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service techni- cians. Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car’s com- puter system.

Volvo original accessories are tested to ensure that they function with the car sys- tems for performance, safety and emissions control. In addition, a trained and qualified Volvo service technician knows where acces- sories may or may not be safely installed in your Volvo. Always seek the advice of a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before installing any accessories in or on your car.

Accessories that are not approved by Volvo may not have been specifically tested for use with your car.

Some of the car’s performance or safety sys- tems can be negatively affected if you install accessories that have not been tested by Volvo, or if you permit someone without experience of the car to install accessories.

Damage that is caused by accessories instal- led in a non-approved or incorrect way is not covered by any new car warranty. More war- ranty information can be found in the service and warranty booklet. Volvo does not accept

||

YOUR VOLVO

38

any liability for deaths, personal injury or costs arising as a result of the installation of non-original accessories.

Related information Important information on accessories and

auxiliary equipment (p. 37)

Connection of equipment to the car’s diagnostic socket Incorrect connection and installation of software or diagnostic tools may have a negative effect on the car’s electronic system.

We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when associ- ated software is installed in the car’s computer system.

Data link connector (On-board Diagnostic, OBDII) is under the instrument panel on the driver’s side.

NOTE

Volvo Cars accepts no liability for the conse- quences if unauthorised equipment is con- nected to the On-board Diagnostic socket (OBDII). This socket should only be used by trained and qualified Volvo service techni- cians.

Related information Important information on accessories and

auxiliary equipment (p. 37)

YOUR VOLVO

39

Showing the car’s identification number When contacting a Volvo dealer concerning your Volvo On Call subscription, for example, you will

need the car’s identification number (VIN7).

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Continue to System System

Information Vehicle Identification Number.

> The car’s identification number is shown.

Another way of finding the VIN is to look on the dashboard through the car’s windscreen, on the first page of the service and warranty booklet or in the car’s registration certificate.

VIN is positioned in a similar place on all models.

Driver distraction The driver is responsible for doing everything possible to ensure the safety of themselves, their passengers and other road users. Part of this responsibility is avoiding distractions such as carrying out an activity that is not related to oper- ating the car in a driving environment.

Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with con- tent-rich entertainment and communications sys- tems. This could be mobile phones with hands- free, navigation systems and audio systems with lots of functions. You may also have other porta- ble electronic devices for your own convenience. Used correctly, in a safe way they can enrich the driving experience. If they are used in the wrong way they could distract you.

We wish to give the following warnings regarding such systems, to indicate Volvo’s concern for your safety. Never use a device or function in the car in such a way that it will distract you from the task of driving safely. Distractions can lead to serious accidents. Apart from these general warnings, we offer the following advice regarding the new functions that may be in the car:

WARNING

Never use a hand-held mobile phone while driving. In some areas it is forbidden for the driver to use a mobile phone while the car is moving.

If the car is equipped with a navigation system you must only set and change the itinerary when the car is parked.

Never program the audio system while the car is moving. Program the radio’s presets when the car is parked and then use the programmed presets for faster and simpler use of the radio.

Never use laptops or hand-held comput- ers while the car is moving.

Related information Sound, media and Internet (p. 482)

7 Vehicle Identification Number

SAFETY

42

Safety The vehicle is equipped with several safety sys- tems that work together to protect the vehicle’s driver and passengers in the event of an acci- dent.

The car is equipped with a number of sensors that react in the event of an accident and activate different safety systems, such as different types of airbags and seatbelt tensioners. Depending on the specific accident situation, such as collisions at different angles, roll-over or driving off the road, the systems react in different ways to pro- vide the best protection.

There are also mechanical safety systems such as Whiplash Protection System. The car is also constructed so that a large part of the force of a collision is distributed to beams, pillars, floor, roof and other parts of the body.

The car’s safety mode may be activated after a collision if an important function in the car has been damaged.

Warning symbol in driver display The warning symbol is illuminated in the driver display when the car’s elec- trical system is set in ignition position II. The symbol is extinguished after

approx. 6 seconds if the car’s safety system is fault-free.

WARNING

If the warning symbol remains illuminated or is switched on during driving and the mes- sage SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to workshop is shown in the driver display, it means that part of one of the safety systems does not have full functionality. Volvo recom- mends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted as soon as possible.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the car’s various safety systems yourself. Defective work in one of the systems can cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted.

If the specific warning symbol is broken then the general warning symbol is illu- minated instead and the driver display shows the same message.

Related information Safety during pregnancy (p. 42)

Seatbelts (p. 44)

Airbags (p. 49)

Whiplash Protection System (p. 43)

Safety mode (p. 56)

Child safety (p. 57)

Safety during pregnancy It is important that the seatbelt is used correctly during pregnancy, and that pregnant drivers adjust their seating position.

Seatbelt

The diagonal section should wrap over the shoul- der then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen.

The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no twists in the seatbelt.

Seating position As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers must adjust the seat and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehi-

SAFETY

}}

* Option/accessory. 43

cle as they drive (which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steer- ing wheel). The aim should be to position the seat with as large a distance as possible between abdomen and steering wheel.

Related information Safety (p. 42)

Seatbelts (p. 44)

Manual front seat (p. 180)

Power* front seat (p. 181)

Whiplash Protection System Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) reduces the risk of whiplash injuries. The system consists of energy absorbing backrests and seat cushion, as well as a specially designed head restraint in the front seats.

WHIPS is deployed in the event of a rear-end collision, where the angle and speed of the colli- sion and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence.

When WHIPS is deployed, the front seat back- rests are lowered backward and the seat cush- ions move downward to change the seating posi- tion of the driver and front seat passenger. Its movement helps to absorb some of the forces that can arise and cause whiplash.

WARNING

WHIPS is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS yourself. Volvo recommends that an author- ised Volvo workshop should be contacted.

If the front seats have been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a colli- sion, the seats must be replaced. Some of the seats’ protective properties may have been lost even if they do not appear damaged.

Do not leave any objects on the floor behind or under the front seats or in the rear seat that may prevent WHIPS from functioning.

||

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.44

WARNING

Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat’s back- rest.

If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered then any load must be secured to prevent it from sliding up to the front seat backrest in the event of a collision.

WARNING

If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered or a rear-facing child seat is used in the rear seat, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not make contact with the lowered backrest or child seat.

Seating position For optimum protection from WHIPS the driver and passenger must have the correct seating position and make sure that the system’s func- tion is not obstructed.

Set the correct seating position in the front seat before driving starts.

Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint.

WHIPS and child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by WHIPS.

Related information Safety (p. 42)

Manual front seat (p. 180)

Power* front seat (p. 181)

Rear Collision Warning (p. 353)

Seatbelts Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used.

It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position.

WARNING

Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to hooks or other interior fittings, as this pre- vents the belt from tightening properly.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

SAFETY

}}

45

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted.

If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt’s protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt.

Related information Safety (p. 42)

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 46)

Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 45)

Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 48)

Putting on and taking off seatbelts Make sure that all passengers have fastened their seatbelts before starting to drive.

Putting on seatbelts 1. Pull out the seatbelt slowly and make sure it

is not twisted or damaged.

NOTE

The seatbelt is equipped with an inertia reel that is locked in the following situations:

if the belt is extended too quickly.

during braking and acceleration.

if the car leans heavily.

when driving in bends.

2. Lock the belt by inserting the locking tab in the intended buckle.

> A loud «click» indicates that the belt has locked.

WARNING

Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. The seatbelts and buckles would otherwise possibly not function as intended in the event of a colli- sion. There is a risk of serous injury.

3. In the front seats the seatbelt can be adjusted for height.

Press together the seat mounting and move the seatbelt up or down.

Position the belt as high as possible without it chafing against your throat.

||

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.46

The seatbelt must pass over the shoulder (not down over the arm).

4. Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder.

The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen).

WARNING

Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.

WARNING

Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to hooks or other interior fittings, as this pre- vents the belt from tightening properly.

WARNING

Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not function as intended in the event of a colli- sion. There is a risk of serous injury.

Taking off seatbelts 1. Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle

and then let the belt retract.

2. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does not hang loose.

Related information Seatbelts (p. 44)

Seatbelt tensioner (p. 46)

Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 48)

Seatbelt tensioner The car is fitted with standard seatbelt tension- ers and electric* seatbelt tensioners that can tension the seatbelts in critical situations and collisions.

Standard seatbelt tensioner All the seatbelts are equipped with a standard seatbelt tensioner.

The seatbelt tensioner tensions the seatbelt in the event of a collision with sufficient force in order to more effectively restrain the occupant.

Electric seatbelt tensioner* The driver and front passenger seatbelts are equipped with an electric seatbelt tensioner.

The seatbelt tensioners work together and can be activated together with the driver support sys- tems City Safety and Rear Collision Warning. In critical situations, such as panic braking, driving off the road (e.g. the car rolls into a ditch, lifts off the ground or hits something in the terrain), skid- ding, or risk of collision, the seatbelt can be ten- sioned by the seatbelt tensioner’s electric motor.

The electric seatbelt tensioner helps to adjust the occupant to a better position, reducing the risk of striking the car’s interior and improving the effect of safety systems, such as the car’s airbags.

When the critical situation has come to an end, the seatbelt and the electric seatbelt preten-

SAFETY

* Option/accessory. 47

sioner are restored automatically, but they can also be restored manually.

IMPORTANT

If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger side will also be deactivated.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted.

If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt’s protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt.

Related information Seatbelts (p. 44)

Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 45)

Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner* (p. 47)

Activating and deactivating passenger air- bag* (p. 52)

City Safety (p. 338)

Rear Collision Warning (p. 353)

Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner* The electric seatbelt tensioner is designed to be reset automatically, but the seatbelt tensioner can be reset manually if the belt remains extended.

1. Stop the car at a safe place.

2. Unfasten the seatbelt and then refasten it.

> The seatbelt and electric seatbelt ten- sioner are reset.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted.

If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt’s protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt.

Related information Seatbelt tensioner (p. 46)

Seatbelts (p. 44)

SAFETY

48

Door and seatbelt reminder The system reminds unbelted occupants to wear a seatbelt, and also warns about an open door, bonnet or lid.

Driver display graphics

Graphics in the driver display with different types of warnings. The warning colour on the door and tailgate is dependent on the vehicle’s speed.

The driver display’s graphics show which seats in the car are occupied by belted and unbelted pas- sengers.

The same graphic also shows if the bonnet, tail- gate or any door is open.

The graphic can be acknowledged by pressing the O button on the right-hand steering wheel keypad.

Seatbelt reminder

Visual reminder in the roof console.

A visual reminder is given in the roof console and by means of the warning symbol in the driver dis- play.

The acoustic reminder is dependent on speed, driving time and distance.

The belt status of the driver and passengers is shown in the driver display graphics when a belt is buckled or unbuckled.

Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt reminder system.

Front seat A visual and acoustic reminder remind the driver and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one.

Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions:

Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat. The driver dis- play’s graphics are shown when the seatbelts are in use.

Reminding that a seatbelt in the rear seat is unfastened during a journey by means of a visual and acoustic reminder. The reminder will cease once the seatbelt has been put on again.

Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate and fuel filler flap If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or a door is not closed properly, the driver display’s graphics show what is open. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the source of the warning.

If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the driver display’s information symbol illu- minates.

If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the driver display’s warning symbol illumi- nates.

SAFETY

49

Related information Seatbelts (p. 44)

Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 45)

Airbags The car is equipped with airbags and inflatable curtains for driver and passengers.

NOTE

The detectors react differently depending on the nature of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt positions.

It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The detectors sense the force of the collision on the vehicle and the action is adapted accord- ingly so that none, one or more airbags are deployed.

WARNING

The airbag system’s control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, discon- nect the cables to the starter battery. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recom- mends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.

Deployed airbags If any of the airbags have deployed, the following is recommended:

Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo work- shop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.

Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car’s safety systems.

Always contact a doctor.

WARNING

Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/injury after inten- sive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.

Related information Safety (p. 42)

Driver airbags (p. 50)

Passenger airbag (p. 51)

Side airbags (p. 54)

Inflatable curtains (p. 55)

SAFETY

50

Driver airbags As a supplement to the seatbelts, the car is equipped with steering wheel airbag and knee

airbag1 on the driver’s side.

Steering wheel airbag and knee airbag1 on the driver’s side in the front seat.

In the event of a frontal collision, the airbags help to protect the head, neck, face and chest of the driver as well as the knees and legs.

A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag/airbags is inflated. The airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the occu- pant. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious per- sonal injury.

Steering wheel airbag location This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.

Knee airbag1 location The airbag is folded up in the lower part of the instrument panel on the driver’s side. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG.

WARNING

Do not place or attach any object on the top or front of the panel where the knee airbag is stowed.

Related information Airbags (p. 49)

Passenger airbag (p. 51)

1 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.

SAFETY

}}

51

Passenger airbag As a supplement to the seatbelts, the vehicle is equipped with an airbag on the passenger side in the front seat.

Front passenger airbag in front seat.

In the event of a frontal collision, the airbag helps to protect the head, neck, face and chest of the passenger as well as the knees and legs.

A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag is inflated. The airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious per- sonal injury.

Passenger airbag location The airbag is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG.

WARNING

Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located.

Label for passenger airbag

Label on the passenger side’s sun visor.

The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above.

WARNING

If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti- vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air- bag will always be activated.

||

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.52

WARNING

Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat.

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.

Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.

Related information Airbags (p. 49)

Driver airbags (p. 50)

Activating and deactivating passenger air- bag* (p. 52)

Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* The passenger airbag can be deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch, Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch (PACOS).

The switch for the passenger airbag is located on the passenger end of the instrument panel and is accessible when the passenger door is open.

Check that the switch is in the required position.

ON — the airbag is activated and all front-fac- ing passengers (children and adults) can sit safely on the passenger seat.

OFF — The airbag is deactivated and children in rear-facing child seats can sit safely on the passenger seat.

WARNING

If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti- vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air- bag will always be activated.

SAFETY

}}

53

Activating passenger airbag

Pull the switch outward and turn from OFF to ON.

> The driver display shows the message Passenger airbag on Please acknowledge.

NOTE

If the passenger airbag has been activated/ deactivated with the car in ignition position I or lower, a message is shown in the driver display and the following indicator in the roof console approx. 6 seconds after the car’s electrical system has been set in ignition position II.

2. Confirm the message by pressing the right- hand steering wheel keypad’s O button.

> A text message and a warning symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated.

WARNING

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated.

The passenger airbag must always be acti- vated when front-facing passengers (children and adults) are sitting in the front passenger seat.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.

Deactivating passenger airbag

Pull the switch outward and turn from ON to OFF.

> The driver display shows the message Passenger airbag off Please acknowledge.

NOTE

If the passenger airbag has been activated/ deactivated with the car in ignition position I or lower, a message is shown in the driver display and the following indicator in the roof console approx. 6 seconds after the car’s electrical system has been set in ignition position II.

||

SAFETY

54

2. Confirm the message by pressing the right- hand steering wheel keypad’s O button.

> A text message and a symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is deactivated.

WARNING

Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.

IMPORTANT

If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger side will also be deactivated.

Related information Seatbelt tensioner (p. 46)

Child seats (p. 58)

Side airbags The side airbags on the driver’s and passenger seats act to protect the chest and hips in the event of a collision.

The side airbags are fitted in the outer backrest frames of the front seats and help to protect the driver and passengers in the front seat.

A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision.

SAFETY

55

WARNING

Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the side airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.

WARNING

Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.

Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.

WARNING

Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Side airbags and child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag.

Related information Airbags (p. 49)

Inflatable curtains The Inflatable Curtain (IC), helps to prevent the driver and passengers from striking their heads on the inside of the car during a collision.

The inflatable curtain is mounted along both sides of the headlining and helps protect the driver and outer seat passengers of the car. The panels are labelled with IC AIRBAG.

A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the inflatable curtain system can cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.

WARNING

Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hooks are only designed for light coats and jackets (not for solid objects such as umbrellas).

Do not screw or install anything onto the car’s headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends only using Volvo genuine parts that are approved for fitting within these areas.

WARNING

Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the load and the side windows if the car is loaded to above the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised.

WARNING

The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Related information Airbags (p. 49)

SAFETY

56

Safety mode Safety mode is a protective state that is trig- gered when a collision may have damaged any of the car’s vital functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for any of the safety systems, or the brake system.

If the car has been in a collision, the message Safety mode See Owner’s manual may be shown on the driver display with a warning sym- bol as long as the display is not damaged and the car’s electrical system is still in working order. This message means that the car has reduced functionality.

WARNING

Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See Owner’s manual mes- sage is shown in the driver display. Leave the car at once.

If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to attempt to reset the system in order to start and move the car for a short distance, if in a danger- ous traffic situation for example.

WARNING

Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Volvo recommends that engaging an author- ised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See Owner’s manual has been shown.

WARNING

If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its loca- tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.

Related information Safety (p. 42)

Starting and moving the car after safety mode (p. 56)

Recovery (p. 474)

Starting and moving the car after safety mode If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to attempt to reset the system in order to start and move the car for a short distance, if in a danger- ous traffic situation for example.

Starting the car after safety mode 1. Check the general damage situation of the

car and whether any fuel has been leaking. There must be no smell of fuel either.

If there is only minor damage and a check has revealed no fuel leaks, starting can be attempted.

WARNING

Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See Owner’s manual mes- sage is shown in the driver display. Leave the car at once.

2. Switch off the car.

SAFETY

}}

57

3. Then try to start the car.

> The car’s electronics carry out a systems check and then try to resume normal sta- tus.

IMPORTANT

If the message Safety mode See Owner’s manual is still shown on the display the car must not be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery service must then be used instead. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hid- den damage may make the car impossible to control once moving.

Moving the car after safety mode 1. If the driver display shows the message

Normal mode The car is now in normal mode after a start attempt, the car can be carefully moved if standing in a dangerous position.

2. Do not move the car further than necessary.

WARNING

If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its loca- tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.

Related information Safety mode (p. 56)

Starting the car (p. 408)

Recovery (p. 474)

Child safety Children must always sit secure while travelling in the car.

Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats and attachment devices) which is designed for fitting in this particular car. Using Volvo’s child safety equipment, you obtain the optimum conditions for a child to travel safely in the car. In addition, the child safety equipment fits in well and is simple to use.

The equipment that should be used is selected taking account of the weight and size of the child.

Volvo recommends that children travel in a rear- facing child seat until as late an age as possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then in a front-facing child seat until the child is 140 cm (4 feet 7 inches) tall.

NOTE

Legal provisions about the type of child seat that must be used for children of different ages and heights vary from country to coun- try. Check what does apply.

||

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.58

NOTE

When using child safety equipment, it is important to read the installation instructions included.

In the event of questions when fitting child safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.

Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger.

Related information Safety (p. 42)

Child seats (p. 58)

Activating and deactivating child safety locks (p. 266)

Child seats Suitable child seats should always be used when children are travelling in the car.

Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make sure that the child seat is positioned, mounted and used correctly.

Look in the installation instructions for the child seat for the correct fitting.

NOTE

When using child safety equipment, it is important to read the installation instructions included.

In the event of questions when fitting child safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.

NOTE

Never leave a child seat loose in the car. Always secure it according to the instructions for the child seat, even when it is not in use.

Related information Child safety (p. 57)

Integrated child seat* (p. 70)

Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 59)

Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 59)

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 60)

Child seat positioning (p. 61)

Activating and deactivating passenger air- bag* (p. 52)

SAFETY

}}

* Option/accessory. 59

Upper mounting points for child seats The car is equipped with upper mounting points for child seats on the rear seat’s outer seats.

The upper mounting points are primarily intended for use with front-facing child seats.

Always follow the manufacturer’s installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the upper mounting points.

The location of the mounting points

Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols on the rear of the backrest.

The mounting points are located on the rear of the rear seat’s outer seats.

WARNING

The child seat’s upper straps must be routed through the hole in the head restraint leg before they are tensioned at the mounting point. If this is not possible, follow the recom- mendations from the child seat manufacturer.

NOTE

Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate fitting this type of child seat in cars with fold- ing head restraints on the outer seats.

NOTE

In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage compartment, this must be removed before child seats can be attached to the securing points.

Related information Child seats (p. 58)

Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 59)

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 60)

Table for location of child seats using the car’s seatbelts (p. 64)

Lower mounting points for child seats The car is equipped with lower mounting points for child seats in the front seat* and the rear seat.

The lower mounting points are designed to be used in conjunction with certain rear-facing child seats.

Always follow the manufacturer’s installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the lower mounting points.

The location of the mounting points

Mounting point locations in the front seat.

The mounting points in the front seat are located on the sides of the passenger seat’s legroom.

||

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.60

The mounting points in the front seat are only mounted if the vehicle is equipped with a switch to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag*.

Mounting point locations in the rear seat.

The mounting points in the rear seat are located on the rear section of the front seat’s floor rails.

Related information Child seats (p. 58)

Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 59)

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 60)

Table for location of child seats using the car’s seatbelts (p. 64)

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats The car is equipped with i-Size/ISOFIX mount- ing points for child seats in the rear seat.

i-Size/ISOFIX2 is a fixture system for car child seats that is based on an international standard.

Always follow the manufacturer’s installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points.

The location of the mounting points

Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols2 on the upholstery of the backrest.

The mounting points for i-Size/ISOFIX are located behind covers in the lower section of the rear seat’s backrest, in the outer seats.

Lift the covers in order to access the mounting points.

Related information Child seats (p. 58)

Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 59)

Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 59)

Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 66)

Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 67)

2 Names and symbols change depending on market.

SAFETY

61

Child seat positioning It is important to position the child seat in the right place in the car. The choice of location depends, amongst other things, on the type of child seat and whether the passenger airbag is activated.

Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible.

Always fit rear-facing child seats in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. If a child is sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.

If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rear- facing child seats can be fitted on the front pas- senger seat.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the placement of chil- dren in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply.

WARNING

Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat.

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.

Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury.

Label for passenger airbag

Label on the passenger side’s sun visor.

The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above.

Related information Child seats (p. 58)

Child seat mounting (p. 62)

Table for location of child seats using the car’s seatbelts (p. 64)

Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 66)

Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 67)

SAFETY

62

Child seat mounting It is important to remember a number of things when a child seat is mounted and used, which depend on where the child seat is positioned.

WARNING

Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle’s opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.

Do not secure the straps for the child seat into the seat’s horizontal adjustment bar or in springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.

Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.

NOTE

When using child safety equipment, it is important to read the installation instructions included.

In the event of questions when fitting child safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.

NOTE

Never leave a child seat loose in the car. Always secure it according to the instructions for the child seat, even when it is not in use.

Installation in the front seat When fitting rear-facing child seats, check

that the passenger airbag is deactivated.

When fitting front-facing child seats, check that the passenger airbag is activated.

Only use child seats that are recommended by Volvo, are universally approved or are semi-universal, and where the car is included on the manufacturer’s vehicle list.

ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted when the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console3

accessory.

If the child seat is equipped with lower straps, Volvo recommends that the lower mounting points are used with these3.

If the child seat is equipped with support legs, always fit the support leg/support legs directly to the floor. Never fit a support leg to a footrest or other object.

The ISOFIX guide can be used in order to facilitate child seat installation.

Installation in the rear seat Only use child seats that are recommended

by Volvo, are universally approved or are semi-universal, and where the car is included on the manufacturer’s vehicle list.

A child seat with support legs must not be fitted in the centre seat.

The outer seats are equipped with the ISOFIX fixture system and are approved for i-Size4.

The outer seats are equipped with upper mounting points. Volvo recommends that child seat’s upper straps should be pulled through the hole in the head restraint before being tensioned at the mounting point. If this is not possible, follow the recommendations from the child seat manufacturer.

If the child seat is equipped with lower straps, never adjust the position of the seat in front after the straps have been fitted in the lower mounting points. Always remember to remove the lower straps when the child seat is not installed.

If the child seat is equipped with support legs, always fit the support leg/support legs directly to the floor. Never fit a support leg to a footrest or other object.

3 The accessory range varies depending on market. 4 Varies depending on market.

SAFETY

63

Related information Child seat positioning (p. 61)

Table for location of child seats using the car’s seatbelts (p. 64)

Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 66)

Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 67)

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.64

Table for location of child seats using the car’s seatbelts The table gives a recommendation for which child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child.

NOTE

Always read the owner’s manual section on installing a child seat before installing one in the car.

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing

child seats)A

Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing

child seats)A

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 0

max 10 kg UB, C X UC UC

Group 0+

max 13 kg UB, C X UC UC

Group 1

9-18 kg LD UFB, E UE, LD UE

Group 2

15-25 kg LD UFB, F UF, B*, G, LD UF

SAFETY

* Option/accessory. 65

Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing

child seats)A

Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing

child seats)A

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 3

22-36 kg X UFB, F UF, B*, G UF

U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group.

UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats.

L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.

B: Built-in restraint approved for this mass group.

X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group.

A The seat cushion extension must always be retracted for the installation of child seats. B Adjust the backrest to a more upright position. C Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146). D Volvo recommends: Volvo rear-facing seat (type approval E5 04212). E Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group. F Volvo recommends: Booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312). G Volvo recommends: Integrated child seat (type approval E5 04220).

WARNING

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated.

Related information Child seat positioning (p. 61)

Child seat mounting (p. 62)

Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 66)

Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 67)

Seatbelts (p. 44)

SAFETY

66

Table for location of i-Size child seats The table gives a recommendation for which i-Size child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child.

The child seat must be approved in accordance with UN Reg R129.

NOTE

Always read the owner’s manual section on installing a child seat before installing one in the car.

Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-

facing child seats)

Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-fac-

ing child seats)

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

i-Size child seats X X i-UA, B X

i-U: Suitable for i-Size «universal» child seat, front-facing and rear-facing.

X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats.

A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group. B Volvo recommends: BeSafe iZi Kid X2 i-Size (type approval E4-129R-000002).

Related information Child seat positioning (p. 61)

Child seat mounting (p. 62)

Table for location of child seats using the car’s seatbelts (p. 64)

Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 67)

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 60)

SAFETY

}}

67

Table for location of ISOFIX child seats The table gives a recommendation for which ISOFIX child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child.

The child seat must be approved in accordance with UN Reg R44 and the car model must be included in the manufacturer’s vehicle list.

NOTE

Always read the owner’s manual section on installing a child seat before installing one in the car.

Weight Size classA Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated air-

bag, only rear-facing child

seats)B, C

Front seat (with activated air-

bag, only front-facing child

seats)B, C

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 0

max 10 kg E Rear-facing infant seat ILB, D, XE X ILD X

Group 0+

max 13 kg

E Rear-facing infant seat

ILB, D, F, XE X ILD XC Rear-facing child seat

D Rear-facing child seat

||

SAFETY

68

Weight Size classA Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated air-

bag, only rear-facing child

seats)B, C

Front seat (with activated air-

bag, only front-facing child

seats)B, C

Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 1

9-18 kg

A Front-facing child seat

X ILB, F, G, XE ILG, IUFG XB Front-facing child seat

B1 Front-facing child seat

C Rear-facing child seat ILB, F, XE X IL X

D Rear-facing child seat

IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal catego- ries.

IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.

X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems.

A For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat’s label. B Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market). There are no

upper mounting points for child seats here. C The seat cushion extension must always be retracted for the installation of child seats. D Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146). E Applicable if the car is not fitted with an ISOFIX bracket. F Adjust the backrest so that the head restraint does not interfere with the child seat. G Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.

WARNING

Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated.

NOTE

If an i-Size/ISOFIX child seat has no size classification, the car model must be included on the vehicle list for the child seat.

NOTE

Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo dealer for information about which i-Size/ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.

SAFETY

69

Related information Child seat positioning (p. 61)

Child seat mounting (p. 62)

Table for location of child seats using the car’s seatbelts (p. 64)

Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 66)

i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 60)

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.70

Integrated child seat* The integrated child seats on the outer positions in the rear seat allow children to sit comfortably and safely.

The child seat is specially designed to provide children with good safety, together with the car’s seatbelt. The seat cushion can be raised in two positions depending on the weight of the child.

The child seat is approved for children who weigh 15-36 kg (33-80 lbs) and are at least 95 cm (37 inches) tall.

Correct position, the seatbelt should be positioned in on the shoulder.

Check before driving that:

the seat cushion is raised to the correct posi- tion for the weight of the child

the seat cushion in locked in position

the seatbelt is in contact with the child’s body and is not slack or twisted

the seatbelt does not lie across the child’s throat or below the shoulder

the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned low over the pelvis to provide optimal protec- tion.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that repair or replacement of the integrated child seat is only performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifications or additions to the child seat. If an integrated child seat has been subjected to a heavy load, e.g. in connection with a collision, then the seat cushion, seat- belt and backrest, or possibly the whole seat, must be replaced. Even if the child seat appears to be undamaged, it may not afford the same level of protection. This also applies if the seat cushion was in lowered position during a collision or similar. The seat cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily worn.

WARNING

If the instructions for the integrated child seat are not followed then the child could sustain serious injury in the event of an accident.

Related information Child seats (p. 58)

Folding up the seat cushion in the integrated child seat* (p. 71)

Folding down the seat cushion in the inte- grated child seat* (p. 72)

SAFETY

}}

* Option/accessory. 71

Folding up the seat cushion in the integrated child seat* The seat cushion should always be folded up when the integrated child seat is in use.

The seat cushion can be folded up in two posi- tions. The position that should be used depends on the weight of the child.

Lower position Upper position

Weight 22-36 kg (50-80 lbs)

15-25 kg (33-55 lbs)

Lower position:

Pull the handle forwards and upwards to release the seat cushion.

Press the seat cushion backwards to lock.

Upper position, start from the lower position:

Press the button to release the seat cushion.

Lift the seat cushion up at the front edge and press it back against the backrest to lock.

WARNING

If the instructions for the integrated child seat are not followed then the child could sustain serious injury in the event of an accident.

NOTE

It is not possible to adjust the seat cushion from the upper position to the lower position. From the upper position, the seat cushion must first be fully lowered into the rear seat, and then folded up to the lower position.

||

SAFETY

* Option/accessory.72

Related information Integrated child seat* (p. 70)

Folding down the seat cushion in the inte- grated child seat* (p. 72)

Folding down the seat cushion in the integrated child seat* The seat cushion should be folded down into the rear seat when the integrated child seat is not being used.

NOTE

It is not possible to adjust the seat cushion from the upper position to the lower position. From the upper position, the seat cushion must first be fully lowered into the rear seat, and then folded up to the lower position.

Pull the handle forwards to release the seat cushion.

Press down with your hand in the centre of the seat cushion in order to lock it.

IMPORTANT

Check that there are no loose objects (e.g. toys) left behind in the space under the child seat’s seat cushion before lowering.

NOTE

Before the rear backrest is lowered, the child seat’s seat cushion must be lowered first.

Related information Integrated child seat* (p. 70)

Folding up the seat cushion in the integrated child seat* (p. 71)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.74

Instruments and controls in left- hand drive car The overviews show where the displays and controls near the driver are located.

Steering wheel and instrument panel

Position lamps, daytime running lights, dipped beam, main beam, direction indica- tors, front fog lamps/cornering lights*, rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter

Steering wheel paddles for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox*

Head-up display*

Driver display

Wipers and washing, rain sensor*

Right-hand steering wheel keypad

Steering wheel adjustment

Horn

Left-hand steering wheel keypad

Bonnet opening

Display lighting, tailgate unlocking/opening*/ closing*, halogen headlamp levelling

Roof console

Front reading lamps and interior lighting

Panorama roof*

Display in roof console, ON CALL button*

Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror

Centre and tunnel console

Centre display

Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media

Gear selector

Start knob

Drive mode control*

Parking brake

Automatic braking when stationary

Driver’s door

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 75

Memories for power front seat*, door mirror and head-up display* settings

Central locking

Power windows, door mirrors, electric child safety lock*

Adjusting front seat

Related information Manual front seat (p. 180)

Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 195)

Lighting control (p. 146)

Starting the car (p. 408)

Driver display (p. 77)

Overview of centre display (p. 103)

Gearbox (p. 421)

Instruments and controls in right- hand drive car The overviews show where the displays and controls near the driver are located.

Steering wheel and instrument panel

Position lamps, daytime running lights, dipped beam, main beam, direction indica- tors, front fog lamps/cornering lights*, rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter

Steering wheel paddles for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox*

Head-up display*

Driver display

Wipers and washing, rain sensor*

Right-hand steering wheel keypad

Display lighting, tailgate unlocking/opening*/ closing*, halogen headlamp levelling

Bonnet opening

Horn

Steering wheel adjustment

Left-hand steering wheel keypad

Roof console

Front reading lamps and interior lighting

Panorama roof*

Display in roof console, ON CALL button*

Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror

Centre and tunnel console

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.76

Centre display

Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media

Gear selector

Start knob

Drive mode control*

Parking brake

Automatic braking when stationary

Driver’s door

Memories for power front seat*, door mirror and head-up display* settings

Central locking

Power windows, door mirrors, electric child safety lock*

Adjusting front seat

Related information Manual front seat (p. 180)

Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 195)

Lighting control (p. 146)

Starting the car (p. 408)

Driver display (p. 77)

Overview of centre display (p. 103)

Gearbox (p. 421)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 77

Driver display The driver display shows information about the car and driving.

The driver display contains gauges, indicators and indicator and warning symbols. The content of the driver display depends on the car’s equip- ment, settings and which functions are active at that time.

The driver display is activated as soon as a door is opened, i.e. in ignition position 0. The driver display extinguishes after a while if it is not used. To reactivate it, proceed with one of the following:

Depress the brake pedal.

Activate ignition position I.

Open one of the doors.

The driver display is available in two versions, 8- inch and 12-inch*.

WARNING

If the driver display should extinguish, not illu- minate on activation/start or be fully or parti- ally illegible, the car must not be used. You should visit a workshop immediately. Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

In the event of a fault in the driver display the information on e.g. brakes, airbags or other safety systems may not be shown. In which case, the driver cannot check the status of the car’s systems or receive current warnings and information.

Driver display, 8-inch

Location in the driver display:

On the left In the middle On the right

Fuel gauge Speedometer Media player

Drive mode Road Sign Information* Phone

Gear shift indicator Cruise control and speed limiter information Navigation information*

Tachometer/ECO gaugeA Door and seatbelt information Clock

Distance to empty tank Start/stop function status App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)

Outside temperature gauge Instantaneous fuel consumption

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.78

On the left In the middle On the right

Indicator and warning symbols OdometerB

Trip meter

Indicator and warning symbols

Voice recognition

Engine temperature gauge

Messages, in some cases with graphics

CompassA

A Depends on drive mode selected. B Accumulated mileage.

Driver display, 12-inch*

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 79

Location in the driver display:

On the left In the middle On the right

Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols Tachometer/ECO gaugeA

Trip meter Outside temperature gauge Gear shift indicator

OdometerB Clock Drive mode

Cruise control and speed limiter information Messages, in some cases with graphics Fuel gauge

Road Sign Information* Door and seatbelt information Start/stop function status

Media player Distance to empty tank

Navigation map* Instantaneous fuel consumption

Phone App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)

Voice recognition

CompassA

A Depends on drive mode selected. B Accumulated mileage.

Dynamic symbol The dynamic symbol in its basic form.

The centre of the driver display contains a dynamic symbol that changes appearance for dif-

ferent types of message. An amber or red marker around the symbol indicates the degree of severity of a control or warning message.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

80

Examples of indicator symbol.

With an animation, the basic shape can be turned into a graphic showing where a problem is situ- ated, or in order to clarify information.

Related information Driver display settings (p. 81)

Warning symbols in the driver display (p. 90)

Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 88)

Trip computer (p. 82)

Messages in the driver display (p. 99)

Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 98)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 81

Driver display settings Settings for the driver display’s display options can be made via the driver display’s application menu and via the centre display’s settings menu.

Settings via the driver display’s app menu

The figure is schematic — parts may vary depending on car model.

The app menu is opened and controlled using the right-hand keypad on the steering wheel.

In the app menu, you can choose which informa- tion is shown on the driver display from

Trip computer

media player

phone

navigation system*.

Settings via the centre display

Selecting information type 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display’s top

view.

2. Press My Car Displays Driver Display Information.

3. Select what should be shown in the back- ground:

Show no information in background

Show information for current playing media

Show navigation even if no route is set1

Selecting theme 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display’s top

view.

2. Tap on My Car Displays Display Themes.

3. Select a theme (appearance) for the driver display:

Glass

Minimalistic

Performance

Chrome Rings

Selecting language 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display’s top

view.

2. Tap on System System Languages and

Units System Language to select lan- guage.

> A change will affect the language in all displays.

These settings are personal and are saved auto- matically to the active driver profile.

Related information Driver display (p. 77)

Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 98)

Other settings in the centre display’s top view (p. 126)

1 The 12-inch* driver display shows the map, the 8-inch driver display only shows guidance.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

82

Fuel gauge The fuel gauge in the driver display shows the fuel level in the tank.

Fuel gauge in the 12-inch driver display:

The beige zone in the fuel gauge indicates the quantity of fuel in the tank.

When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and changes to amber. The trip computer also indi- cates the distance to empty tank.

Fuel gauge in the 8-inch driver display:

The bars in the fuel gauge indicate the quantity of fuel in the tank.

When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and changes to amber. The trip computer also indi- cates the distance to empty tank. Only an amber bar remains when the fuel level is critically low. Refuel the car as soon as possible.

Related information Driver display (p. 77)

Filling fuel (p. 449)

Fuel tank — volume (p. 649)

Trip computer The car’s trip computer records vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption and average speed whilst driving.

In order to facilitate fuel-efficient driving, informa- tion is recorded about both instantaneous and average fuel consumption. The information from the trip computer can be shown in the driver dis- play.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 83

12-inch driver display*.

8-inch driver display.

The following meters are included in the trip computer:

Trip meter

Odometer

Instantaneous fuel consumption

Distance to empty tank

Tourist — alternative speedometer

Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via system settings in the centre display.

Trip meter There are two trip meters, TM and TA.

TM can be reset manually and TA is reset auto- matically if the car is not used for at least four hours.

The following information is registered while driv- ing:

Mileage

Driving time

Average speed

Average fuel consumption

The values apply from the trip meter’s latest reset.

Odometer The odometer records the car’s total mileage. This value cannot be reset to zero.

Instantaneous fuel consumption This gauge shows the fuel consumption that the car has at the moment. The value is updated approximately every second.

Distance to empty tank The trip computer calculates the remaining mileage with the fuel availa- ble in the tank.

The calculation is based on the average fuel con- sumption over the last 30 km (20 miles) and the remaining drivable fuel quantity.

When the gauge shows «—-«, there is not enough fuel left to be able to calculate the remaining mileage. Refuel as soon as possible.

NOTE

There may be a slight deviation if the driving style has been changed.

An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance.

Tourist — alternative speedometer The alternative digital speedometer makes it eas- ier to drive in countries where speed limit signs are in a different unit than that shown in the car’s instruments.

The digital speed is then shown in the opposite unit to that shown in the analogue speedometer. If the analogue speedometer is graduated in mph, the digital speedometer shows the corres- ponding speed in km/h and vice versa.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

84

Related information Show trip data in the driver display (p. 84)

Resetting the trip meter (p. 85)

Show trip statistics in the centre display (p. 85)

Driver display (p. 77)

Changing system units (p. 126)

Show trip data in the driver display The trip computer’s recorded and calculated val- ues can be shown in the driver display.

The values are saved in a trip computer app. Via the app menu, you can choose which information is shown on the driver display.

Open and navigate in the app menu2 using the right- hand steering wheel keypad.

App menu

Left/right

Up/down

Confirm

1. Open the app menu in the driver display by pressing (1).

(It is not possible to open the app menu while there is an unacknowledged message in the driver display. The message first has to be confirmed by pressing the O button (4) before the app menu can be opened.)

2. Navigate to the trip computer app to left or right with (2).

> The top four menu rows show measured values for trip meter TM. The next four menu rows show measured values for trip meter TA. Scroll up or down in the list with (3).

3. Scroll down to the option buttons to select which information to show in the driver dis- play:

Odometer

Distance to empty tank

Tourist (alternative speedometer)

Mileage for trip meter TM, TA, or no dis- play of mileage

Instantaneous fuel consumption, average consumption for TM or TA, alternatively, no display of fuel consumption

Select or deselect an option with the O but- ton (4). The change is made immediately.

2 The figure is schematic — parts may vary depending on car model.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

85

Related information Trip computer (p. 82)

Resetting the trip meter (p. 85)

Resetting the trip meter Reset the trip meter using the left-hand stalk switch.

Reset all information in trip meter TM (i.e. mileage, average consumption, average speed and driving time) with a long press on the RESET button on the left-hand stalk switch.

A short press on the RESET button resets only the mileage.

The trip meter TA can only be reset automatically when the car has not been used for four or more hours.

Related information Trip computer (p. 82)

Show trip statistics in the centre display Trip statistics from the trip computer are dis- played graphically in the centre display and pro- vide an overview that facilitates more fuel-effi- cient driving.

Open the Driver performance app in app view in order to show the trip statistics.

Each bar in the diagram sym- bolises a distance of 1, 10 or 100 km, alternatively miles. The

bars are filled in from the right as driving pro- gresses. The bar on the far right shows the value for the current distance.

The average fuel consumption and total driving time are calculated since the last time the trip statistics were reset.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

86

Trip statistics from the trip computer3.

Related information Settings for trip statistics (p. 86)

Trip computer (p. 82)

Settings for trip statistics Reset or adjust settings for trip statistics.

1. Open the Driver performance app in app view in order to show the trip statistics.

2. Press Preferences to

change graph scale. Select resolution 1, 10 or 100 km/miles for the bar.

reset data after every trip. Performed when the car has been stationary for more than 4 hours.

reset data for the current trip.

Trip statistics, calculated average consump- tion and total driving time are always reset simultaneously.

Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via system settings in the centre display.

Related information Show trip statistics in the centre display

(p. 85)

Trip computer (p. 82)

Resetting the trip meter (p. 85)

3 The figure is schematic — parts may vary depending on car model.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 87

Date and time The clock is shown in both the driver display and the centre display.

Clock location

Clock location in the 12-inch* and 8-inch driver display.

In certain situations, messages and information may cover the clock in the driver display.

In the centre display, the clock is located at the top right of the status bar.

Date and time settings Select Settings System Date and

Time in the centre display’s top view to change settings for time and date format.

Adjust the date and time by pressing the up or down arrow on the touch screen.

Automatic time for cars with GPS When the car is equipped with a navigation sys- tem, Auto Time can be selected. The time zone is then adjusted automatically based on the loca- tion of the car. For certain types of navigation systems, the current location (country) must also be set to obtain the right time zone. If Auto Time is not selected, time and data are adjusted with arrow up or arrow down on the touch screen.

Summer time In certain countries, it is possible to select the Auto Daylight Saving Time setting for auto- matic setting of summer time. For other coun- tries, the Daylight Saving Time setting can be selected manually.

Related information Driver display (p. 77)

Other settings in the centre display’s top view (p. 126)

Outside temperature gauge The outside temperature is shown in the driver display.

A sensor detects the temperature outside of the car.

Outside temperature gauge location in the 12-inch* and 8-inch driver display.

If the car has been stationary, the gauge may dis- play a temperature reading that is too high.

When the outside temperature is in the range 5 C to +2 C (23 F to 36 F), a snowflake symbol lights up that warns of potentially slippery conditions.

The symbol is also illuminated briefly in the head- up display*, if the car is equipped with one.

Change the unit for the temperature gauge, etc. via system settings in the centre display’s top view.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

88

Related information Driver display (p. 77)

Changing system units (p. 126)

Indicator symbols in the driver display The indicator symbols alert the driver that a func- tion is activated, that a system is operating, or that a fault or abnormal condition has occurred.

Symbol Specification

Information, read display text

When one of the car’s systems does not behave as intended, this information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the driver display. The information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.

Fault in brake system

The symbol lights up when there is a fault in the parking brake.

ABS fault

If this symbol illuminates then the system is not working. The car’s regular brake system continues to work, but without the ABS function.

Symbol Specification

Automatic brake on

The symbol illuminates when the function is activated and the foot brake or parking brake is acting. The brake holds the car stationary when it has stopped.

Tyre pressure system

The symbol illuminates when tyre pressure is too low. If there is a fault in the tyre pressure system, the symbol will flash for approx. 1 minute and then illuminate with a constant glow. This may be because the system cannot detect or warn of low tyre pressure as intended.

Emissions system

If the symbol illuminates after the engine has been started then it may be due to a fault in the car’s emissions system. Drive to a work- shop for checking. Volvo recom- mends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

89

Symbol Specification

Left and right-hand direction indicator

The symbol flashes when the direc- tion indicators are used.

Position lamps

The symbol lights up when the position lamps are switched on.

Fault in the headlamp system

The symbol illuminates if a fault has occurred in the ABL function (Active Bending Lights) or if another fault has occurred in the headlamp system.

Active main beam on

The symbol lights up blue when active main beam is on.

Active main beam off

The symbol lights up white when active main beam is off.

Symbol Specification

Main beam On

The symbol illuminates when main beam is on and with main beam flash.

Active main beam on

The symbol lights up blue when active main beam is on. Position lamps are switched on.

Active main beam off

The symbol lights up white when active main beam is off. Position lamps are switched on.

Main beam On

The symbol lights up when main beam and the position lamps are switched on.

Front fog lamps on

This symbol illuminates when the front fog lamp is switched on.

Rear fog lamp on

This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

Symbol Specification

Rain sensor on

This symbol illuminates when the rain sensor is on.

Preconditioning on

The symbol illuminates when the engine block and passenger com- partment heater/air conditioning are preconditioning the car.

Stability system

A flashing symbol indicates that the stability system is operating. If the symbol illuminates with con- stant glow then there is a fault in the system.

Stability system, sport mode

The symbol illuminates when the sport mode is activated. Sport mode allows for a more active driv- ing experience. The system then detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skidding of the rear sec- tion up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

90

Symbol Specification

Lane assistance

White symbol: Lane assistance is on and road lines are detected.

Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on but road lines are not detected.

Amber symbol: Lane assistance warns/intervenes.

Lane assistance and rain sensor

White symbol: Lane assistance is on and road lines are detected. Rain sensor is on.

Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on but road lines are not detected. Rain sensor is on.

AdBlue system (diesel)

The symbol illuminates when the AdBlue level is low or in the event of a fault in the AdBlue system.

Related information Driver display (p. 77)

Warning symbols in the driver display (p. 90)

Warning symbols in the driver display The warning symbols alert the driver that an important function is activated or that a serious fault or condition exists.

Symbol Specification

Warning

The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety or drivability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the driver display at the same time. The warning symbol can also illuminate in con- junction with other symbols.

Seatbelt reminder

This symbol illuminates or flashes if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.

Symbol Specification

Airbags

If the symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, a fault has been detected in one of the car’s safety systems. Read the message in the driver display. Volvo recom- mends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.

Fault in brake system

If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level may be too low. Visit the nearest authorised workshop to have the brake fluid level checked and rectified.

Parking brake applied

This symbol illuminates with a con- stant glow when the parking brake is applied.

A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen. Read the message in the driver display.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

91

Symbol Specification

Low oil pressure

If this symbol illuminates during driving then the engine’s oil pres- sure is too low. Stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal, contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that an author- ised Volvo workshop is contacted.

Alternator not charging

This symbol illuminates during driv- ing if a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that an author- ised Volvo workshop is contacted.

Collision risk

City Safety warns of a risk of colli- sion with other vehicles, pedes- trians, cyclists or large animals.

Related information Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 88)

Driver display (p. 77)

License agreement for the driver display A license is an agreement for the right to oper- ate a certain activity or the right to use someone else’s entitlement according to the terms and conditions in the agreement. The following text is Volvo’s agreement with the manufacturer or developer.

Boost Software License 1.0 Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or organization obtaining a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license (the «Software») to use, reproduce, display, distribute, execute, and transmit the Software, and to prepare derivative works of the Software, and to permit third-parties to whom the Software is furnished to do so, all subject to the following: The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement, including the above license grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer, must be included in all copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and all derivative works of the Software, unless such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of machine-executable object code generated by a source language processor.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED «AS IS», WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-

INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

92

BSD 4-clause «Original» or «Old» License Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.

4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS «AS IS» AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

BSD 3-clause «New» or «Revised» License Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. Neither the name of the organisation nor the names of its contributors may be used to

endorse or promote products derive from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS «AS IS» AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

93

BSD 2-clause Simplified license Copyright (c) , All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS «AS IS» AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,

OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The views and conclusions contained in the software and documentation are those of the authors and should not be interpreted as representing official policies, either expressed or implied, of the FreeBSD Project.

FreeType Project License 1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner,

Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg Introduction The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages; some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine, various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the FreeType Project. This license applies to all files found in such packages, and which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs, documentation and makefiles, at the very least. This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion and use of free software in commercial and freeware products alike. As a consequence, its main points are that: o We don’t promise that this software works. However, we are be interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is’

distribution) o You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty-free’ usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you’ve used the FreeType code. (`credits’) We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this software, with or without modifications, in commercial products, provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product vendor. Legal Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license, the terms `package’, `FreeType Project’, and `FreeType archive’ refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType project’, be they named as alpha, beta or final release. `You’ refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where `using’ is a generic term including compiling the project’s source code as well as linking it to form a `program’ or `executable’. This program is referred to as `a program using the FreeType engine’. This license applies to all files distributed in the original FreeType archive, including all source code, binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive. If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by this license, you

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

94

must contact us to verify this. The FreeType project is copyright (C) 1996-1999 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as specified below. 1. No Warranty THE FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS PROVIDED `AS IS’ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not signed this license, you are not required to accept it. However, as the FreeType project is copyrighted material, only this license, or another one contracted with the authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms of this license.

2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file (`licence.txt’) unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying

documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered, original files must be preserved in all copies of source files. o Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that states that the software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your documentation, though this isn’t mandatory. These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the FreeType code, not just the unmodified files. If you use our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid to us.

3. Advertising The names of FreeType’s authors and contributors may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation or advertising materials: `FreeType Project’, `FreeType Engine’, `FreeType library’, or `FreeType Distribution’.

4. Contacts There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: o freetype@freetype.org Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as future and wanted additions to the library and distribution. If you are looking for support, start in this list if you haven’t found anything to help you in the documentation. o devel@freetype.org

Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc. o http://www.freetype.org Holds the current FreeType web page, which will allow you to download our latest development version and read online documentation. You can also contact us individually at: David Turner Robert Wilhelm Werner Lemberg

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

95

Libpng License This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your convenience. In case of any discrepancy between this copy and the notices in the file png.h that is included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall prevail.

COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE:

If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this sentence.

libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c) 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors

Simon-Pierre Cadieux

Eric S. Raymond

Gilles Vollant

and with the following additions to the disclaimer:

There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.

libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors:

Tom Lane

Glenn Randers-Pehrson

Willem van Schaik

libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors:

John Bowler

Kevin Bracey

Sam Bushell

Magnus Holmgren

Greg Roelofs

Tom Tanner

libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.

For the purposes of this copyright and license, «Contributing Authors» is defined as the following set of individuals:

Andreas Dilger

Dave Martindale

Guy Eric Schalnat

Paul Schmidt

Tim Wegner

The PNG Reference Library is supplied «AS IS». The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage.

Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, subject to the following restrictions:

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

96

1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented.

2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source.

3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution.

The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this source code in a product, acknowledgment is not required but would be appreciated.

A «png_get_copyright» function is available, for convenient use in «about» boxes and the like:

printf(«%s»,png_get_copyright(NULL));

Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the files «pngbar.png» and «pngbar.jpg (88×31) and «pngnow.png» (98×31).

Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark of the Open Source Initiative.

Glenn Randers-Pehrson randeg@alum.rpi.edu April 15, 2002

MIT License Copyright (c)

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the «Software»), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED «AS IS», WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

zlib License The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c)

This software is provided ‘as-is’, without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.

Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:

1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required.

2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software.

3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

97

SGI Free Software B License Version 2.0. SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0, Sept. 18, 2008)

Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the «Software»), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http:// oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED «AS IS», WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.

Related information Driver display (p. 77)

Application menu in driver display Application menu (app menu) in the driver dis- play provides quick access to commonly used functions for certain apps.

The figure is schematic.

The app menu in the driver display can be used instead of the centre display and is controlled using the right-hand keypad on the steering wheel. The app menu makes it easier to switch between different apps or functions within the apps without having to let go of the steering wheel.

App menu functions Different apps give access to different types of functions. The following apps and their associ- ated functions can be controlled from the app menu:

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

98

App Functions

Trip com- puter

Selection of trip meter, selec- tion of what to show in the driver display, etc.

Media player

Selection of active source for the media player.

Phone Calling a contact from the call list.

Navigation Guide to destination, etc.

Related information Driver display (p. 77)

Overview of centre display (p. 103)

Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 98)

Handling the application menu in the driver display The application menu (the app menu) in the driver display is operated with the steering wheel’s right-hand keypad.

The app menu and the steering wheel’s right-hand key- pad.

Open/close

Left/right

Up/down

Confirm

Opening/closing the app menu Press on open/close (1).

> The app menu opens/closes.

NOTE

It is not possible to open the app menu while there is an unacknowledged message in the driver display. The message has to be con- firmed first before the app menu can be opened.

The app menu closes automatically after a period of inactivity or after certain options have been selected.

Navigating and selecting in the app menu 1. Navigate between the apps by pressing on

the left or right (2).

> Functions for previous/next app are shown in the app menu.

2. Browse through the functions for the selected app by tapping on up or down (3).

3. Confirm or highlight an option for the func- tion by pressing on confirm (4).

> The function is activated and for some options the app menu then closes.

If the app menu is opened again, the functions of the most recently selected app are shown first.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

99

Related information Application menu in driver display (p. 97)

Messages in the driver display (p. 99)

Messages in the driver display The driver display can show messages to inform or assist the driver in the event of different events.

Examples of messages in the driver display4.

Examples of messages in the driver display5.

The driver display shows messages that are of high priority for the driver.

Messages can be shown in different parts of the driver display depending on what other informa- tion is currently being displayed. After a while, or when the message has been acknowledged/ action taken if required, the message disappears from the driver display. If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in the Car Status app, which is opened from the app view in the centre display.

Message composition may vary and they can be shown together with graphics, symbols or buttons for acknowledging the message or accepting a request, for example.

4 With 8-inch driver display. 5 With 12-inch driver display.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

100

Service messages Shown below is a selection of important service messages and their meanings.

Message Specification

Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage — consult a work- shopB.

Turn off engineA

Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage — consult a work- shopB.

Service urgent Drive to work- shopA

Contact a workshopB to check the car immediately.

Service requiredA

Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible.

Regular main- tenance

Book time for maintenance

Time for regular service — contact a workshopB. Shown before the next service date.

Regular main- tenance

Time for main- tenance

Time for regular service — contact a workshopB. Shown at the next service date.

Message Specification

Regular main- tenance

Maintenance overdue

Time for regular service — contact a workshopB. Shown when the service date has passed.

Temporarily offA

A function has been tem- porarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after starting again.

A Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen.

B An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Managing messages in the driver display

(p. 100)

Handling a message saved from the driver display (p. 102)

Message in centre display (p. 134)

Managing messages in the driver display Messages in the driver display are handled using the steering wheel’s right-hand keypad.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

101

Examples of messages in the driver display6 and the steering wheel’s right-hand keypad.

Examples of messages in the driver display7 and the steering wheel’s right-hand keypad.

Left/right

Confirm

Some messages in the driver display contain one or more buttons for acknowledging the message or accepting a request, for example.

Managing a new message For messages with buttons:

1. Navigate between the buttons by pressing on the left or right (1).

2. Confirm the selection by pressing on confirm (2).

> The message disappears from the driver display.

For messages without buttons:

Close the message by pressing on confirm (2), or allow the message to close automati- cally after a while.

> The message disappears from the driver display.

If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in the Car Status app, which is opened from the app view in the centre display. The message Car message stored in Car Status application is shown in the centre display in conjunction with this.

Related information Messages in the driver display (p. 99)

Handling a message saved from the driver display (p. 102)

Message in centre display (p. 134)

6 With 8-inch driver display. 7 With 12-inch driver display.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

102

Handling a message saved from the driver display Whether saved from the driver display or the centre display, messages are managed in the centre display.

Saved messages can be seen in the Car Status app.

Messages that are shown in the driver display and that need to be saved are added in the Car Status app in the centre display. The message Car message stored in Car Status application is shown

in the centre display in conjunction with this.

Reading a saved message To read a saved message immediately:

Press the button to the right of the Car message stored in Car Status application message in the centre display.

> The saved message is shown in the Car Status app.

To read a saved message later:

1. Open the Car Status app from the app view in the centre display.

> The app is opened in the bottom tile of the home view.

2. Select the Messages tab in the app.

> A list of saved messages is shown.

3. Tap on a message to expand/minimise.

> More information on the message is shown in the list and the image to the left in the app shows information about the message graphically.

Managing a saved message In maximised mode, some messages have two buttons available to book service or read the owner’s manual.

To book service for a saved message:

In maximised mode for the message, press Request appoint./Call to make Appointment8 for help in booking service.

> With Request appoint.: The Appointments tab opens in the app and creates a request to book service and repair work.

With Call to make Appointment: The phone app is initiated and calls a service centre to book service and repair work.

To read the owner’s manual for a saved mes- sage:

In maximised mode for the message, press Owner’s manual to read about the mes- sage in the owner’s manual.

> The owner’s manual opens in the centre display and shows information linked to the message.

Saved messages in the app are deleted automat- ically each time the engine is started.

Related information Messages in the driver display (p. 99)

Managing messages in the driver display (p. 100)

Message in centre display (p. 134)

8 Market dependent. Volvo ID and selected workshop also need to be registered.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

103

Overview of centre display Many of the car’s functions are controlled from the centre display. Presented here is the centre display and its options.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.104

Three of the centre display’s basic views. Swipe right or left to access the function or app view respectively9.

Function view — car functions that are acti- vated or deactivated with a press. Certain

functions are also so-called trigger functions, which means they open a window with set-

ting options. Examples of these include Camera. Settings for the head-up display*

9 The views are reversed for right-hand drive cars.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 105

are also made from the function view, but adjustments are made using the steering wheel’s right-hand keypad.

Home view — the first view that is shown when the screen is started.

Application view (app view) — apps that have been downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded functions, such as FM radio. Tap on an app icon to open the app.

Status bar — the activities in the car are shown right at the top of the screen. Network and connection information is shown on the left-hand side of the status bar, while media- related information, the clock and indication about on-going background activity are shown on the right.

Top view — drag the tab down in order to access the top view. Settings, Owner’s manual, Profile and the car’s saved mes- sages are accessed from here. In some cases contextual settings (e.g. Navigation Settings) and the contextual owner’s manual (e.g. Navigation Manual) can also be accessed in the top view.

Navigation — leads to map navigation, with e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap on the subview to expand it.

Media — recently used apps associated with media. Tap on the subview to expand it.

Phone — the phone function can be reached from here. Tap on the subview to expand it.

Extra subview — recently used apps or car functions that do not belong in any of the other subviews. Tap on the subview to expand it.

Climate row — information and direct interac- tion to set temperature and seat heating for example*. Tap on the symbol in the centre of the climate row in order to open the climate view with more setting options.

Related information Managing the centre display (p. 106)

Navigating in the centre display’s views (p. 109)

Function view in centre display (p. 116)

Apps (p. 484)

Symbols in the centre display’s status bar (p. 118)

Other settings in the centre display’s top view (p. 126)

Open contextual setup in the centre display (p. 127)

Owner’s manual in centre display (p. 17)

Media player (p. 493)

Phone (p. 508)

Climate controls (p. 209)

Switching off and changing the volume of the system sound in the centre display (p. 125)

Changing the appearance in the centre dis- play (p. 125)

Changing system language (p. 126)

Changing system units (p. 126)

Cleaning the centre display (p. 617)

Message in centre display (p. 134)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

106

Managing the centre display Many of the car’s functions are controlled and regulated from the centre display. The centre display is a touch screen that reacts to touch.

Using the touch screen functionality in the centre display The screen reacts differently depending on whether you press, drag or swipe across it. Actions such as browsing between different views, marking objects, scrolling in a list and mov-

ing apps can be performed by touching the screen in different ways.

An infrared light curtain just above the surface of the screen enables the screen to detect a finger that is just in front of the screen. This technology makes it possible to use the screen even with gloves on.

Two people can interact with the screen at the same time, e.g. to adjust the climate for the driver and passenger side respectively.

IMPORTANT

Do not use sharp objects on the screen as they may scratch it.

The table below presents the different proce- dures for operating the screen:

Procedure Execution Result

Press once. Highlights an object, confirms a selection or activates a function.

Press twice in quick suc- cession.

Zooms in on a digital object, such as the map.

Press and hold. Grabs an object. Can be used to move apps or map points on the map. Press and hold your finger against the screen and at the same time drag the object to the desired location.

Tap once with two fin- gers.

Zooms out from a digital object, such as the map.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

107

Procedure Execution Result

Drag Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Hold depressed and drag in order to move apps or map points on the map. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.

Swipe/drag quickly Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.

Note that touching the upper section of the screen may cause the top view to open.

Drag apart Zooms in.

Drag together Zooms out.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

108

Returning to home view from another view 1. Briefly press the home button below the cen-

tre display.

> The last position of the home view is shown.

2. Briefly press again.

> All subviews of the home view are set to their default mode.

NOTE

In home view standard mode — briefly press the home button. An animation that describes access to the different views is shown on the screen.

Scrolling in a list, article or view When a scroll indicator is visible in the screen, it is possible to scroll downward or upward in the view. Swipe downwards/upwards anywhere in the view.

The scroll indicator appears in the centre display when it is possible to scroll in the view.

Using the controls in the centre display

Temperature control.

The control is used for many of the car’s func- tions. Regulate e.g. temperature by means of one of the following:

drag the control to the desired temperature,

tap on + or in order to raise or lower the temperature gradually, or

tap on the desired temperature on the con- trol.

Related information Activating and deactivating centre display

(p. 109)

Moving apps and buttons in centre display (p. 118)

Keyboard in centre display (p. 120)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 109

Activating and deactivating centre display The centre display can be dimmed and reactiva- ted using the home button beneath the screen.

Home button for the centre display.

The effect of using the home button that the screen dims and the touchscreen no longer reacts to touch. The climate row will still be shown. All functions connected to the screen are still running, such as climate, audio, guidance* and apps. When the centre display is dimmed, it is a good opportunity to clean the screen. The dimming function can also be used to fade the screen so that it does not disturb while driving.

1. Give a long press on the physical home but- ton below the screen.

> The screen goes dark except for the cli- mate row, which continues to be shown. All functions connected to the screen are still running.

2. Reactivate the screen — briefly tap on the home button.

> The view that was displayed before the screen was switched off will be shown again.

NOTE

The screen cannot be deactivated when a prompt to perform an action is shown on the screen.

NOTE

The centre display deactivates automatically when the engine is off and the driver’s door is opened.

Related information Cleaning the centre display (p. 617)

Changing the appearance in the centre dis- play (p. 125)

Overview of centre display (p. 103)

Navigating in the centre display’s views There are five different basic views in the centre display: home view, top view, climate view, appli- cation view (app view) and function view. The screen is started automatically when the driver’s door is opened.

Home view Home view is the view that is shown when the screen is started. It consists of four subviews: Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra sub- view.

An app or car function selected from the app or function view starts in the respective subview of the home view. E.g. FM radio starts in the Media tile.

The extra tile shows the last used app or car function that is not associated with any of the other three areas.

The subviews show brief information about each different app.

NOTE

When the car is started, the home view’s vari- ous sub-views show information on the cur- rent status of apps.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.110

NOTE

In home view standard mode — briefly press the home button. An animation that describes access to the different views is shown on the screen.

Status bar The activities in the car are shown at the top of the screen. Network and connection information is shown on the left-hand side of the status bar, while media-related information, the clock and indication that background activity is in progress are shown on the right.

Top view

Top view dragged down.

A tab is located in the centre of the status bar at the top of the screen. Open the top view by

pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping from the top downwards across the screen.

In the top view, access is always available to:

Settings

Owner’s manual

Profile

The car’s saved messages.

In the top view, access is given to the following in some cases:

Contextual setting (e.g. Navigation Settings). Change settings directly in the top view when an app (e.g. navigation) is run- ning.

Contextual Owner’s Manual (e.g. Navigation Manual). Gain access directly in the top view to articles in the digital owner’s manual that are related to the content displayed on screen.

Exit the top view — press outside the top view, on the home button or at the bottom of the top view and drag upward. The underlying view is then visi- ble and available for use again.

NOTE

The top view is not available during starting/ shutdown or when a message is shown on the screen. It is also not available when cli- mate view is shown.

Climate view The climate row is always visible at the bottom of the screen. The most common climate settings can be made directly there, such as setting tem- perature and seat heating*.

Press the symbol in the centre of the climate row to open the climate view and gain access to more climate set- tings.

Press the symbol to close the climate view and return to the previous view.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 111

Application view

Application view with the car’s apps.

Swipe from right to left10 across the screen in order to access the application view (app view) from the home view. Apps that have been down- loaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded functions, such as FM radio, are found here. Cer- tain apps show brief information directly in the

app view, such as the number of unread text messages for Messages.

Tap on an app to open it. The app then opens in the tile to which it belongs, e.g. Media.

You can scroll down in the app view, depending on the number of apps. Do this by swiping/drag- ging from the bottom and up.

Go back to the home view again by swiping from left to right10 across the screen, or by pressing the home button.

Function view

The function view with buttons for different car func- tions.

Swipe from left to right10 across the screen in order to access the function view from the home view. From here you can activate or deactivate different car functions, e.g. BLIS*, Lane Keeping Aid* and Park Assist*.

10 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars — swipe in the opposite direction.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

112

Depending on the amount of functions, it is also possible here to scroll downward in the view. Do this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.

Unlike in app view, where an app is opened with a press, a function is activated or deactivated by pressing the relevant function button. Some func- tions (trigger functions) open in a new window when pressed.

Go back to the home view again by swiping from right to left10 across the screen, or by pressing the home button.

Related information Managing subviews in centre display

(p. 113)

Symbols in the centre display’s status bar (p. 118)

Other settings in the centre display’s top view (p. 126)

Open contextual setup in the centre display (p. 127)

Owner’s manual in centre display (p. 17)

Driver profiles (p. 130)

Climate controls (p. 209)

Apps (p. 484)

Function view in centre display (p. 116)

Overview of centre display (p. 103)

10 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars — swipe in the opposite direction.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

113

Managing subviews in centre display Home view consists of four subviews: Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra sub- view. These views can be expanded.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

114

Expanding a subview from default mode

Standard mode and expanded mode of a subview in the centre display.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

115

Expanding a subview:

For tiles Navigation, Media and Phone: Press anywhere on the subview. When a tile is expanded, the extra tile in the home view is temporarily forced away. The other two tiles are minimised and only certain information is shown. When the extra tile is tapped, the other three tiles are minimised and only cer- tain information is displayed.

The expanded view provides access to the basic functions of the app.

Closing an expanded subview:

The subview can be closed in three different ways.

Tap on the upper part of the expanded subview.

Tap on another tile (this tile will then open in expanded mode instead).

Briefly press the physical home button below the centre display.

Opening or closing a subview in full screen mode The extra tile11 and the tile for Navigation can be opened out in full screen mode, with even more information and more setting options.

When a new subview is opened in full-screen mode, no information from the other subviews is shown.

In expanded mode, open the app in full screen — press on the symbol.

Press on the symbol to go back to the expanded mode, or press the home button at the bottom of the screen.

Home button for the centre display.

There is always the option to go back to home view by pressing the home button. To go back to the home view’s standard view from full screen mode press twice on the home button.

Related information Managing the centre display (p. 106)

Activating and deactivating centre display (p. 109)

Navigating in the centre display’s views (p. 109)

11 Does not apply to all apps or car functions opened via the extra tile.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

116

Function view in centre display All the buttons for car functions are located in the function view, one of the centre display’s basic views. Navigate to the function view from

home view by swiping from left to right across

the screen12. Different types of buttons There are three different types of buttons for car functions; see below:

Type of button Property Affects car function

Function buttons Have on/off positions.

When a function is running, an LED indicator illuminates to the left of the icon for the button. Press the button to activate/deactivate a function.

Most buttons in function view are function buttons.

Trigger buttons Do not have on/off positions.

When a trigger button is depressed, a window for the function is opened. For example, it may be a window to change seat position.

Camera

Headrest Fold

Head-up Display Adjustments

Parking buttons Have on, off and scan modes.

Similar to the function buttons but with an extra position for parking scanning.

Park In

Park Out

12 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars — swipe in the opposite direction.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

117

The buttons’ different modes

When the LED indicator illuminates in green on a function or parking button, the function is acti- vated. When a function is activated, extra text with an explanation for certain functions is shown. The text is shown for a few seconds and then the button is shown with the LED indicator illuminated.

For Lane Keeping Aid, the text Works only at certain speeds is shown, for example, when the button is depressed.

Press the button once briefly to activate or deac- tivate the function.

The function is deactivated when the LED indica- tor is extinguished.

When a warning triangle is shown in the right- hand section of the button there is something not working as intended.

Related information Managing the centre display (p. 106)

Navigating in the centre display’s views (p. 109)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

118

Moving apps and buttons in centre display The apps and buttons for car functions in the app view and function view respectively can be moved and organised as desired.

1. Swipe from right to left13 to access the app view, or swipe from left to right13 to access the function view.

2. Tap on an app or button and hold it down.

> The app or button changes size and becomes slightly transparent. It is then possible to move it.

3. Drag the app or button to a vacant space in the view.

The maximum number of rows available for use in order to position apps or buttons is 48. To move an app or button outside the visible view, drag it to the bottom of the view. New rows are then added, where the app or button can be located.

An app or button can thus be located further down and is then not visible in the normal mode for the view.

Swipe across the screen to scroll up or down in the view.

NOTE

Hide the apps that you rarely or never use by moving them to the bottom, off the visible screen. This way it will be easier to find the apps you use more often.

NOTE

Apps and car function buttons cannot be added to locations that are already occupied.

Related information Function view in centre display (p. 116)

Apps (p. 484)

Managing the centre display (p. 106)

Symbols in the centre display’s status bar Overview of the symbols that can be shown in the centre display’s status bar.

The status bar shows activities in progress and, in some cases, their status. Not all symbols are shown all the time due to the limited space in the status bar.

Symbol Specification

Connected to the Internet.

Roaming activated.

Signal strength in mobile phone net- work.

Bluetooth device connected.

Bluetooth activated but no device connected.

Information sent to and from GPS.

Connected to Wi-Fi network.

Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hotspot). The car then shares the available connection.

13 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars — swipe in the opposite direction.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 119

Symbol Specification

Car modem activated.

USB sharing active.

Process in progress.

Timer for preconditioning active.

Audio source being played back.

Audio source stopped.

Phone call in progress.

Audio source muted.

News is received from the radio channel.

Traffic information is received.

Clock.

Related information Navigating in the centre display’s views

(p. 109)

Message in centre display (p. 134)

Internet-connected car* (p. 517)

Connecting a device via USB port (p. 500)

Phone (p. 508)

Date and time (p. 87)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

120

Keyboard in centre display The centre display keyboard makes it possible make entries using keys. It is also possible to «draw in» letters and characters on the screen by hand.

The keyboard can be used to enter characters, letters and numbers, e.g. to write text messages from the car, enter passwords or search for arti- cles in the digital owner’s manual.

The keyboard is only shown when entries can be made on the screen.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

121

The image shows an overview of some of the buttons which may be shown in the keyboard. The appearance varies depending on language settings and the context in which the keyboard is being used.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

122

Row of suggested words or characters14. The suggested words are adjusted as new letters are being entered. Browse among the suggestions by pressing on the right and left arrows. Tap on a suggestion to select it. Note that this function is not supported by all lan- guage selections. If not available, the row will not be shown on the keyboard.

The characters available on the keyboard depend on which language was selected (see point 7). Tap on a character to enter it.

The button works in different ways, depend- ing on the context in which the keyboard is used — either to enter @ (when an email address is entered) or to create a new row (for normal text input).

Hides the keyboard. If this is not possible, the button is not shown.

Used to enter capital letters. Press again to enter one capital letter and then continue with lower-case letters. Another press makes all letters capital letters. The next press restores the keyboard to lower-case letters. In this mode, the first letter after a full stop, exclamation mark or question mark is a capi- tal letter. The first letter in the text field is also a capital letter. In text fields intended for names or addresses, each word automatically starts with a capital letter. In text fields for password, web address or email address

entry, all letters are automatically lower case unless otherwise set with the button.

Number entry. The keyboard (2) is then

shown with numbers. Press , which in

number mode is shown instead of , to

return to the letter keyboard, or to open the keyboard with special characters.

Changes text input language, e.g. EN. The available characters and word suggestions (1) vary depending on the selected language. To make it possible to change languages for the keyboard, the languages must first be added under Settings.

Space.

Undoes entered text. Pressing briefly deletes one character at a time. Hold the button depressed to delete characters more quickly.

Changes keyboard mode to write letters and characters by hand instead.

Pressing the confirmation button above the key- pad (not visible in the illustration) confirms the entered text. The appearance of the button dif- fers depending on context.

Variants of a letter or character

Variants of a letter or character, e.g. or , can be entered by holding down the letter or charac- ter. A box is displayed showing possible variants of letters or characters. Press the required var- iant. If no variant is selected, the original letter/ character is entered.

Related information Changing keyboard language in centre dis-

play (p. 123)

Enter the characters, letters and words man- ually in the centre display (p. 123)

Managing the centre display (p. 106)

Managing text messages (p. 514)

14 Applies to Asiatic languages.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

123

Changing keyboard language in centre display To make it possible to switch between different languages for the keyboard, the languages must first be added under Settings.

Adding or deleting languages in settings The keyboard is automatically set to the same languages as the system language. The keyboard language can be manually adapted without affecting the system language.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press System System Languages and

Units Keyboard Layouts.

3. Select one or more languages from the list.

> It is now possible to switch between the selected languages directly from the key- board for text input.

If no languages have been actively selected under Settings, the keyboard retains the same language as the car’s system language.

Switching between different languages in the keyboard

When a number of languages have been selected in Settings, the button in the keyboard is used to switch between the different lan- guages.

To change keyboard language with list:

1. Give a long press on the button.

> A list opens.

2. Select the required language. If more than four languages have been selected under Settings, it is possible to scroll in the list from the keyboard.

> The keyboard is adapted to the selected language and other word suggestions are given.

To change the keyboard language without dis- playing the list:

One short press of the button.

> The keyboard is adapted to the next lan- guage in the list without displaying the list.

Related information Changing system language (p. 126)

Keyboard in centre display (p. 120)

Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display The centre display keyboard allows you to enter characters, letters and words on the screen by «drawing» by hand.

Press the button on the key- board to change from typing with the keys to entering letters and characters by hand.

Area for writing characters/letters/words/ parts of word.

The text field where the characters or word suggestions15 appear as they are written on screen (1).

15 Applies to certain system languages.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

124

Suggestions for characters/letters/word/ part of word. It is possible to scroll through the list.

Space. A space can also be created by entering a dash (-) in the area for hand-writ- ten letters (1). See the heading «Entering a space in the free text field with handwriting recognition» below.

Undo entered text. Press briefly to delete one character/one letter at a time. Wait a moment before pressing again to delete the next character/letter, etc.

Return to the keyboard with regular charac- ter input.

Switch off/on sound when entering.

Hide the keyboard. If this is not possible, the button is not shown.

Change text input language.

Writing characters/letters/words by hand 1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts of

a word in the area for hand-written letters (1). Write a word or parts of a word above each other or on a line.

> A number of suggested characters, letters or words is shown (3). The most likely choice is found at the top of the list.

IMPORTANT

Do not use sharp objects on the screen as they may scratch it.

2. Enter the character/letters/word by waiting a moment.

> The character/letter/word at the top of the list is entered. It is also possible to select a different character by pressing the required character, letter or word in the list.

Deleting/changing characters/letters written by hand

Delete all characters in the text field (2) by swiping across the handwriting field (1).

There are several options for deleting/ changing characters/letters:

Press the intended letter or word in the list (3).

Press the text undo button (5) to delete the letter and begin again.

Swipe horizontally from right to left16 over the area for handwritten letters (1). Delete multiple letters by swiping over the area several times.

Pressing the X in the text field (2) deletes all of the entered text.

16 For Arabic keyboard — swipe in the opposite direction. Swiping from right to left creates a space.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

125

Changing row in the free text field with handwriting

Change row by hand by drawing the above character in the handwriting field17.

Entering a space in the free text field with handwriting recognition

Enter a space by drawing a dash from left to right18.

Related information Keyboard in centre display (p. 120)

Changing the appearance in the centre display The appearance of the screen in the centre dis- play can be changed by selecting a theme.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press My Car Displays Display Themes.

3. Then select a theme, e.g. Minimalistic or Chrome Rings.

As a supplement to these appearances, it is pos- sible to choose between Normal and Bright. With Normal, the screen background is dark and the text is light. This alternative is the default for all themes. A light variant can also be selected, in which the background is light and the text is dark. This alternative can be useful in e.g. strong day- light.

This alternative is always available for the user and is not affected by the surrounding lighting.

Related information Other settings in the centre display’s top

view (p. 126)

Activating and deactivating centre display (p. 109)

Cleaning the centre display (p. 617)

Switching off and changing the volume of the system sound in the centre display The centre display can be used to change the volume of the system sound or switch off the system sound altogether.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Sound System Volumes.

3. Under Touch Sounds, drag the control to change the volume/switch off screen touch sounds. Drag the control to the desired vol- ume.

Related information Overview of centre display (p. 103)

Other settings in the centre display’s top view (p. 126)

Audio settings (p. 482)

17 For Arabic keyboards — draw the same character, but reversed. 18 For Arabic keyboard — draw the dash from right to left.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

126

Changing system units Units settings are defined in the centre display’s Settings menu.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Continue to System System Languages

and Units Units of Measurement.

3. Select a unit standard:

Metric — kilometres, litres and degrees Celsius.

Imperial — miles, gallons and degrees Celsius.

US — miles, gallons and degrees Fahren- heit.

> The units in the driver display, centre dis- play and head-up display are changed.

Related information Overview of centre display (p. 103)

Other settings in the centre display’s top view (p. 126)

Changing system language (p. 126)

Changing system language Language settings are defined in the centre dis- play menu Settings.

NOTE

Changing the language in the centre display may mean that some owner’s information is not compliant with national or local laws and regulations. Do not switch to a language that is difficult to understand as this may make it difficult to find your way back through the screen structure.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Continue to System System Languages and Units.

3. Select System Language. Languages that support voice recognition have a voice recog- nition symbol.

> The language in the driver display, centre display and head-up display is changed.

Related information Overview of centre display (p. 103)

Other settings in the centre display’s top view (p. 126)

Changing system units (p. 126)

Other settings in the centre display’s top view You can change settings and information for many of the car’s functions via the centre dis- play.

1. Open the top view by pressing on the tab at the top or by dragging/swiping from the top downwards across the screen.

2. Press Settings to open the settings menu.

Top view with button for Settings.

3. Press on one of the categories and the sub- categories to navigate to the required set- ting.

4. Change one or more settings. Different types of setting are changed in different ways.

> The changes are saved immediately.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

127

A subcategory in the settings menu with different types of settings (here, a multi-selector button and radio but- tons).

Related information Overview of centre display (p. 103)

Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 128)

Table showing centre display settings (p. 129)

Open contextual setup in the centre display It is possible to use contextual setup for most of the car’s basic apps so that you can change set- tings directly in the top view in the centre dis- play.

Top view with button for contextual setting.

Contextual setting is a shortcut for accessing a specific setting relating to the active function shown on screen. The apps installed in the car from the beginning, e.g. FM radio and USB, are a part of Sensus and are part of the car’s embed- ded functions. The settings for these apps can be changed directly via contextual setting in the top view.

When contextual setup is available:

1. Drag down top view when an app is in expanded mode, e.g. Navigation.

2. Press Navigation Settings.

> A navigation settings page opens.

3. Change settings as desired and confirm the selections.

Press Close or the physical home button beneath the centre display to close setup view.

Most of the car’s basic apps have this contextual setting option, but not all.

Third party apps Third party apps are not included in the car’s sys- tem from the beginning, but are the type that can be downloaded e.g. Volvo ID. Here the settings are always made inside the app and not from the top view.

Related information Other settings in the centre display’s top

view (p. 126)

Overview of centre display (p. 103)

Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 128)

Downloading apps (p. 485)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.128

Resetting user data for change of ownership In the event of a change of ownership, user data and system settings should be restored to fac- tory settings.

The settings in the car can be reset at different levels. Restore all user data and system settings to the original factory settings in the event of a change of ownership. In the event of a change of ownership it is also important to change the owner of the Volvo On Call* service.

Related information Resetting settings in the centre display

(p. 128)

Resetting settings in the driver profiles (p. 133)

Resetting settings in the centre display It is possible to reset the defaults for all settings defined in the centre display settings menu.

Two types of reset There are two different types of resets for set- tings in the settings menu:

Factory reset — clears all data and files and resets all settings to their default values.

Reset Personal Settings — clears personal data and resets personal settings to their default values.

Resetting settings Follow these instructions to reset your settings.

NOTE

Factory reset is only possible when the car is stationary.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Continue to System Factory reset.

3. Select the required reset type.

> A pop-up window is shown.

4. Press OK to confirm the reset.

For Reset Personal Settings, the reset must be confirmed by pressing Reset for the active profile or Reset for all profiles.

> Selected settings are reset.

Related information Overview of centre display (p. 103)

Other settings in the centre display’s top view (p. 126)

Table showing centre display settings (p. 129)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 129

Table showing centre display settings The settings menu in the centre display has a number of main categories and subcategories where settings and information for many of the car’s functions are collected.

There are seven main categories: My Car, Sound, Navigation, Media, Communication, Climate and System.

In turn, each category contains a number of sub- categories and setting options. The tables below show the first level of subcategories. The setting options for a function or area are described in more detail in the corresponding section of the owner’s manual.

Some settings are personal, which means that they can be saved to Driver Profiles. Other set- tings are global, which means they are not linked to a driver profile.

My Car

Subcategories

Displays

IntelliSafe

Drive Preferences/Individual Drive Mode*

Lights and Lighting

Mirrors and Convenience

Subcategories

Locking

Parking Brake and Suspension

Wipers

Sound

Subcategories

Tone

Balance

System Volumes

Navigation

Subcategories

Map

Route and Guidance

Traffic

Media

Subcategories

AM/FM radio

DAB*

Gracenote

Subcategories

TV*

Video

Communication

Subcategories

Phone

Text Messages

Android Auto*

Apple CarPlay*

Bluetooth Devices

Wi-Fi

Car Wi-Fi Hotspot

Car Modem Internet*

Volvo On Call*

Volvo Service Networks

Climate The main category Climate has no subcatego- ries.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.130

System

Subcategories

Driver Profile

Date and Time

System Languages and Units

Privacy and Data

Keyboard Layouts

Voice Control*

Factory reset

System Information

Related information Overview of centre display (p. 103)

Other settings in the centre display’s top view (p. 126)

Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 128)

Driver profiles Many of the settings made in the car can be adapted according to the driver’s personal pref- erences and can be saved in one or more driver profiles.

The personal settings are automatically saved in the active driver profile. Each key can be linked to a driver profile. When the linked key is used, the car is adapted to the settings of that specific driver profile.

What settings are saved in the driver profiles? Many of the settings defined in the car will be saved automatically in the active driver profile unless the profile is protected. In the car, the set- tings defined are either personal or global. Only personal settings are saved in driver profiles.

Settings that can be saved in a driver profile include, amongst other things, screens, mirrors, front seats, navigation*, audio and media system, language and voice control.

Some settings, referred to as global settings, can be changed but are not saved to a specific driver profile. Changes to global settings affect all pro- files.

Global settings The global settings and parameters are not changed when changing between driver profiles.

They remain the same regardless of which driver profile is active.

Keyboard layout settings are an example of global settings. If driver profile X is used to add additional languages to the keyboard, these remain available for use even if driver profile Y is used. The keyboard layout settings are not saved to a specific driver profile — the settings are global.

Personal preferences If driver profile X was used to e.g. set centre dis- play brightness, driver profile Y is not affected by this setting. It has been saved to driver profile X — the brightness setting is a personal setting.

Related information Selecting driver profile (p. 131)

Renaming a driver profile (p. 131)

Linking remote control key to driver profile (p. 132)

Protect driver profile (p. 132)

Resetting settings in the driver profiles (p. 133)

Table showing centre display settings (p. 129)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

131

Selecting driver profile When the centre display has been started, the selected driver profile is shown at the top of the screen. The driver profile last used is the one that will be active next time the car is unlocked. It is possible to change to another driver profile after the car has been unlocked. However, if the remote control key has been linked to a driver profile then this is what is selected when the car is started.

There are two options for changing to another driver profile.

Option 1:

1. Tap on the name of the driver profile shown in the top of the centre display when the dis- play has been started.

> A list of selectable driver profiles is shown.

2. Select the driver profile required.

3. Press Confirm.

> The driver profile is selected and the sys- tem loads the settings for the new driver profile.

Option 2:

1. Drag down the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Profile.

> The same list as for Option 1 is shown.

3. Select the driver profile required.

4. Press Confirm.

> The driver profile is selected and the sys- tem loads the settings for the new driver profile.

Option 3:

1. Drag down the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

3. Press System Driver Profiles.

> A list of selectable driver profiles is shown.

4. Select the driver profile required.

5. Press Confirm.

> The driver profile is selected and the sys- tem loads the settings for the new driver profile.

Related information Driver profiles (p. 130)

Navigating in the centre display’s views (p. 109)

Renaming a driver profile (p. 131)

Linking remote control key to driver profile (p. 132)

Renaming a driver profile It is possible to change the name of the different driver profiles used in the car.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press System Driver Profiles.

3. Select Edit Profile.

> A menu opens, where the profile can be edited.

4. Tap in the box Profile Name.

> A keyboard appears, and it is possible to

change the name. Tap on to close the keyboard.

5. Save the name change by pressing Back or Close.

> The name has now been changed.

NOTE

A profile name cannot start with a space, as the profile name will not then be saved.

Related information Selecting driver profile (p. 131)

Keyboard in centre display (p. 120)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

132

Protect driver profile In some cases it is preferable not to save various settings defined in the car to the active driver profile. In this case, it is possible to protect the driver profile.

NOTE

Protecting a driver profile is only possible when the car is stationary.

To protect a driver profile:

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press System Driver Profiles.

3. Select Edit Profile.

> A menu opens, where the profile can be edited.

4. Select Protect Profile to protect the profile.

5. Save your profile protection option by press- ing Back/Close.

> When the profile is protected, settings defined in the car will not be saved auto- matically to the profile. Instead, your changes must be saved manually under

Settings System Driver Profiles

Edit Profile by pressing Save current settings to the profile. When the profile is unprotected, on the other hand, your settings will be saved automatically to the profile.

Related information Driver profiles (p. 130)

Linking remote control key to driver profile It is possible to link your key to a driver profile. The driver profile along with all of its settings will then be automatically selected every time the car is used with that specific remote control key.

The first time the remote control key is used, it is not linked to any specific driver profile. When the car is started, the Guest profile will automatically be activated.

A driver profile can be selected manually without linking it to the key. When the car is unlocked, the last active driver profile is activated. Once the key has been linked to a driver profile, a driver profile does not need to be selected when that specific key is used.

Linking a remote control key to a driver profile

NOTE

Connecting a remote control key to a driver profile is only possible when the car is sta- tionary.

First select the profile to be linked to the key, if the profile to be linked is not already active. The active profile can then be linked to the key.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

133

2. Press System Driver Profiles.

3. Select the desired profile. The display returns to the home view. The Guest profile cannot be linked to a key.

4. Drag down the top view again and tap on

Settings System Driver Profiles Edit Profile.

5. Select Connect key to link the profile with the key. It is not possible to link a driver pro- file to a different key than the one currently being used in the car. If there are multiple keys in the car, the message More than one key is found, put the key you want to connect on backup reader will be dis- played.

Backup reader’s location in the tunnel console. > When the message Profile connected

to key is shown, the key and the driver profile are linked.

6. Press OK.

> This key is now linked to the driver profile and will remain linked as long as the Connect key box is not unticked.

Related information Driver profiles (p. 130)

Renaming a driver profile (p. 131)

Remote control key (p. 237)

Resetting settings in the driver profiles Settings that have been saved to one or more driver profiles can be reset if the car is station- ary.

NOTE

Factory reset is only possible when the car is stationary.

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press System Factory reset Reset Personal Settings.

3. Select one of the options Reset for the active profile, Reset for all profiles or Cancel.

Related information Driver profiles (p. 130)

Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 128)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

134

Message in centre display The centre display can show messages to inform or assist the driver in the event of different events.

Example of a message in the centre display’s top view.

The centre display shows messages that are of lower priority for the driver.

Most messages are shown above the centre dis- play’s status bar. After a while, or when any required action related to the message has been taken, the message disappears from the status bar. If a message needs to be saved, it is posi- tioned in the top view in the centre display.

Message composition may vary and they can be shown together with graphics, symbols or a but- ton for activating/deactivating a function linked to the message.

Pop-up messages In some cases, a message is shown in the form of a pop-up window. Pop-up messages have higher priority than messages shown in the sta- tus bar and require acknowledgement/action before they disappear.

Related information Managing messages in the centre display

(p. 134)

Handling a message saved from the centre display (p. 135)

Messages in the driver display (p. 99)

Managing messages in the centre display Messages in the centre display are handled in centre display views.

Example of a message in the centre display’s top view.

Some messages in the centre display have a but- ton (or several buttons in pop-up messages) for e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to the message.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

135

Managing a new message For messages with buttons:

Press the button to perform the action or allow the message to close automatically after a while.

> The message disappears from the status bar.

For messages without buttons:

Close the message by tapping on it, or allow the message to close automatically after a while.

> The message disappears from the status bar.

If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned in the top view in the centre display.

Related information Message in centre display (p. 134)

Handling a message saved from the centre display (p. 135)

Messages in the driver display (p. 99)

Handling a message saved from the centre display Whether saved from the driver display or the centre display, messages are managed in the centre display.

Examples of saved messages and possible options in the top view.

Messages that are shown in the centre display that need to be saved are added in the top view of the centre display.

Reading a saved message 1. Open the top view in the centre display.

> A list of saved messages is shown. Mes- sages with an arrow to the right can be maximised.

2. Tap on a message to expand/minimise.

> More information on the message is shown in the list and the image to the left in the app shows information about the message graphically.

Managing a saved message Some messages have a button for e.g. activating/ deactivating a function linked to the message.

Press the button to perform the action.

Saved messages in the top view are deleted automatically when the car is switched off.

Related information Message in centre display (p. 134)

Managing messages in the centre display (p. 134)

Messages in the driver display (p. 99)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.136

Head-up display* The head-up display supplements the car’s driver display and projects information from the driver display onto the windscreen. The projec- ted image can only be seen from the driver posi- tion.

The head-up display shows warnings and infor- mation relating to speed, cruise control functions, navigation, etc. in the driver’s field of vision. Road Sign Information and incoming phone calls can also be shown in the head up display.

NOTE

The driver’s ability to see the information in the head-up display is impaired by the follow- ing

use of polarising sunglasses

a driving position which means that the driver is not sitting centred in the seat

objects on the display unit’s cover glass

unfavourable light conditions.

IMPORTANT

The display unit from which the information is projected is located in the instrument panel. To avoid damage to the display unit’s cover glass — do not store any objects on the cover glass and make sure that no objects fall down onto it.

Examples of what can be shown in the display.

Speed

Cruise control

Navigation

Road signs

A number of symbols can be shown temporarily in the head-up display, e.g.:

If the warning symbol illuminates — read the warning message in the driver dis- play.

If the information symbol illuminates — read the message in the driver display.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory. 137

The snowflake symbol illuminates in the event of a risk of icy conditions.

NOTE

Certain visual defects may cause headaches and a feeling of stress during the use of the head-up display.

City Safety in the head-up display

In the event of a collision warning, the information in the head-up display is replaced by the warning symbol for City Safety. This graphic is illuminated even if the head-up display is switched off.

The warning symbol for City Safety flashes in order to attract the driver’s attention if there is a risk of collision.

Related information Activating and deactivating the head-up dis-

play* (p. 137)

Cleaning the head up display* (p. 618)

Head up display when replacing the wind- screen* (p. 589)

Activating and deactivating the head-up display* The head-up display can be activated and deac- tivated when the car has been started.

Press the Head-up Display button in the centre display function view. An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated.

Related information Settings for head-up display* (p. 138)

Head-up display* (p. 136)

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.138

Settings for head-up display* Adjust the settings for the head-up display’s pro- jection onto the windscreen.

Settings can be defined when the car has been started and a projected image is shown on the windscreen.

Selecting display options

Select which functions are to be shown in the head-up display.

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display’s top view.

2. Press My Car Displays Head-Up Display Options.

3. Select one or more functions:

Show Navigation

Show Road Sign Information

Show Driver Support

Show Phone

The setting is saved as a personal setting in the driver profile.

Adjusting brightness and vertical position

1. Press the Head-up Display Adjustments button in the centre display function view.

2. Adjust the brightness and vertical position of the projected image in the driver’s field of vision using the steering wheel’s right-hand keypad.

Reducing the brightness

Increasing the brightness

Raising the position

Lowering the position

Confirm

The brightness of the graphics is automatically adapted to their background light conditions. The brightness is also affected by the adjustment of the brightness in the car’s other displays.

The height position can be stored in the memory function for the power* front seat using the key- pad in the driver’s door.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

* Option/accessory. 139

Calibrate the horizontal position

The head-up display’s horizontal position may need to be calibrated if the windscreen or display unit is replaced. Calibration means that the pro- jected image is rotated clockwise or anticlock- wise.

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display’s top view.

2. Select My Car Displays Head-Up

Display Options Head-Up Display Calibration.

3. Calibrate the image’s horizontal position with the steering wheel’s right keypad.

Rotate anticlockwise

Rotate clockwise

Confirm

Related information Head-up display* (p. 136)

Activating and deactivating the head-up dis- play* (p. 137)

Driver profiles (p. 130)

Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 182)

Voice recognition19

The driver can use voice recognition to control certain functions in the media player, Bluetooth- connected phone, climate system and Volvo’s navigation system*.

Voice commands offer additional convenience and assist the driver to not be distracted so that he or she can concentrate on driving, the road and the traffic situation.

WARNING

The driver always holds overall responsibility for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and complying with all applicable rules of the road.

Voice control system microphone

Voice control is done in dialogue form with the user saying commands and receiving verbal

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.140

responses from the system. The voice recognition system uses the same microphone as Bluetooth- connected devices, and the voice recognition system’s responses are given via the car’s speak- ers. In some cases, a text message is also shown in the driver display. Functions are controlled from the right-hand steering wheel keypad. Set- tings are made via the centre display.

System updating The voice recognition system is continuously improved. Download updates for optimal perform- ance from support.volvocars.com.

Related information Using voice recognition (p. 140)

Controlling a telephone with voice recogni- tion (p. 141)

Voice control of radio and media (p. 142)

Controlling climate control with voice recog- nition (p. 200)

Settings for voice recognition (p. 143)

Using voice recognition20

Depress the steering wheel button for voice recognition

to activate the system and initiate a dialogue using voice commands.

Remember the following:

Speak after the tone with a normal voice at a normal tempo.

Do not speak while the system is replying (the system cannot understand commands during this time).

Avoid background noise in the passenger compartment by having the doors, windows and panoramic roof* closed.

Voice recognition can be deactivated as follows:

briefly press and say «Cancel».

a long press on the steering wheel button for

voice control until you hear two beeps.

To speed up communication and skip the prompts from the system, press the steering

wheel button for voice recognition when the system voice is speaking and say the next com- mand.

To change the system audio volume, turn the rotary volume knob when the voice speaks. It is possible to use other buttons during voice con- trol. However, other sounds will be silenced dur- ing dialogue with the system, which means that it is not possible to execute any functions linked with audio using the buttons.

Example of voice recognition control Press , say «Call [Forename] [Surname] [number category]» — dials the selected contact from the phone book. If the contact has several phone numbers (e.g. home, mobile, work), the right category must be referred to.

So press and say «Call Robin Smith Mobile».

Commands/phrases The following commands can generally be used, regardless of the situation:

«Repeat» — repeats the last voice instruction in the ongoing dialogue.

«Cancel» — discontinue the dialogue.

«Help» — starts a help dialogue. The system replies with the commands available in the current situation, a prompt or an example.

Commands for specific functions such as phone and radio are described in specific sections.

19 Applies to certain markets. 20 Applies to certain markets.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

}}

141

Digits The number commands are stated differently depending on the function to be controlled:

Phone numbers and postcodes must be spoken individually, number by number, e.g. zero three one two two four four three (03122443).

House numbers can be spoken individually or in groups, e.g. two two or twenty-two (22). For English and Dutch, several groups can be said in sequence, e.g. twenty-two twenty- two (22 22). For English, double or triple can be used, e.g. double zero (00). Numbers can be given within the range 0-2300.

Frequencies can be spoken as ninety eight point eight (98.8), a hundred and four point two or hundred four point two (104.2).

Speed and repetition mode It is possible to adjust the speed if the voice is speaking too quickly.

Repetition mode can be enabled so that the sys- tem repeats what you have said.

To change the speed or activate/deactivate repe- tition mode:

1. Press Settings in the top view.

2. Press System Voice Control and select settings.

Repeat Voice Command

Speech Rate

Related information Voice recognition (p. 139)

Controlling a telephone with voice recogni- tion (p. 141)

Voice control of radio and media (p. 142)

Controlling climate control with voice recog- nition (p. 200)

Settings for voice recognition (p. 143)

Controlling a telephone with voice recognition21

Call a contact, have messages read aloud or dictate brief messages with voice control com- mands to a Bluetooth connected telephone.

To specify a contact in the phone book, the voice recognition command must include contact infor- mation that is entered in the phone book. If a contact, e.g. Robyn Smith, has several phone numbers then the number category can also be stated, e.g. Home or Mobile: «Call Robin Smith Mobile».

Press and say one of the following com- mands:

«Call [contact]» — dials the selected contact from the phone book.

«Call [phone number]» — dials the phone number.

«Recent calls» — displays the call list.

«Read message» — message is read out. If there are several messages — select which message should be read out.

«Message to [contact]» — users are requested to say a brief message. The mes- sage is then repeated aloud and the user can choose to send22 or revise the message. For this function to work, the car must be connected to the Internet.

||

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

* Option/accessory.142

Related information Voice recognition (p. 139)

Using voice recognition (p. 140)

Voice control of radio and media (p. 142)

Controlling climate control with voice recog- nition (p. 200)

Settings for voice recognition (p. 143)

Internet-connected car* (p. 517)

Voice control of radio and media23

Commands for radio and media player device control are shown below.

Tap on and say one of the following com- mands:

«Media» — starts a dialogue for media and radio and shows examples of commands.

«Play [artist]» — plays back music by the selected artist.

«Play [song title]» — plays back the selected song.

«Play [song title] from [album]» — plays back the selected song from the selected album.

«Play [TV channel name]» — starts the selected TV channel*24.

«Play [radio station]» — starts playing back the selected radio channel.

«Tune to [frequency]» — starts the selected radio frequency in the current frequency band. If no radio source is active, the FM band is started by default.

«Tune to [frequency] [wavelength]» — starts the selected radio frequency in the selected frequency band.

«Radio» — starts FM radio.

«Radio FM» — starts FM radio.

«Radio AM» — starts AM radio.

«DAB » — starts DAB radio*.

«TV» — starts playback from TV*24.

«CD» — starts playback from CD*.

«USB» — starts playback from USB.

«iPod» — starts playback from iPod.

«Bluetooth» — starts playback from a Blue- tooth-connected media source.

«Similar music» plays back music similar to the music currently playing back from USB devices.

Related information Voice recognition (p. 139)

Using voice recognition (p. 140)

Controlling a telephone with voice recogni- tion (p. 141)

Controlling climate control with voice recog- nition (p. 200)

Settings for voice recognition (p. 143)

21 Applies to certain markets. 22 Only certain phones can broadcast messages from the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com. 23 Applies to certain markets. 24 Applies to certain markets.

DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL

143

Settings for voice recognition25

Settings for the voice control system are selected here.

Settings System Voice Control

Settings can be made within the following areas:

Repeat Voice Command

Gender

Speech Rate

Audio settings Select audio settings under:

Settings Sound System Volumes Voice Control

Language settings Voice recognition is not possible for all lan- guages. Languages available for voice recogni- tion are marked with an icon in the language list —

.

Changing the language also affects menu, mes- sage and help texts.

Settings System System Languages

and Units System Language

Related information Voice recognition (p. 139)

Using voice recognition (p. 140)

Controlling a telephone with voice recogni- tion (p. 141)

Controlling climate control with voice recog- nition (p. 200)

Voice control of radio and media (p. 142)

Audio settings (p. 482)

Changing system language (p. 126)

25 Applies to certain markets.

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory.146

Lighting control The different lighting controls are used to control both exterior and interior lighting. The left-hand stalk switch activates and adjusts the exterior lighting. The interior brightness is adjusted using a thumbwheel on the instrument panel.

Headlamp levelling1 is also adjusted using a thumbwheel on the instrument panel.

Exterior lighting

Rotating ring in the left-hand stalk switch.

When the car’s electrical system is in ignition position II, the following functions are available for the rotating ring’s different positions:

Position Specification

Daytime running lights.

Main beam flash can be used.

Daytime running lights and position lamps.

Position lamps when the car is parked.A

Main beam flash can be used.

Dipped beam and position lamps.

Main beam can be activated.

Main beam flash can be used.

Position Specification

Daytime running lights and position lamps in daylight.

Dipped beam and position lamps in weak daylight or darkness, or when the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog lamp are activated.

The Active main beam function can be activated.

Main beam can be activated when dipped beam is switched on.

Main beam flash can be used.

Active main beam on/off.

A If the car is stationary but running, the rotating ring can be

moved to position from another position to switch on only the position lamps instead of other lighting.

Volvo recommends that mode is used when the vehicle is driven.

1 Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps.

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory. 147

WARNING

The car’s lighting system is not able to deter- mine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations.

The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with a beam pattern suit- able for the traffic situation and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations.

Thumbwheel in instrument panel

A car with LED2 headlamps* has automatic headlamp levelling and therefore does not have the thumbwheel for headlamp levelling.

Thumbwheel for adjusting interior brightness

Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling1

Related information Adjusting light functions via the centre dis-

play (p. 147)

Interior lighting (p. 158)

Position lamps (p. 149)

Using direction indicators (p. 153)

Using main beam (p. 151)

Dipped beam (p. 150)

Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 154)

Rear fog lamp (p. 155)

Active bending lights* (p. 154)

Brake lights (p. 156)

Emergency brake lights (p. 156)

Hazard warning flashers (p. 156)

Adjusting light functions via the centre display Several light functions can be adjusted and acti- vated via the centre display. This applies to active main beam, home safe lighting and approach light, for example.

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display’s top view.

2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting.

3. Select Exterior Lights or Interior Lighting and then select the function that needs to be adjusted.

Related information Lighting control (p. 146)

Active main beam (p. 151)

Using home safe lighting (p. 157)

Approach light duration (p. 157)

Using direction indicators (p. 153)

Other settings in the centre display’s top view (p. 126)

Function view in centre display (p. 116)

2 LED (Light Emitting Diode) 1 Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps.

LIGHTING

148

Adjusting headlamp level Headlamp levelling3 is adjusted using one of the thumbwheels in the instrument panel.

The load in the car changes the vertical align- ment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the headlamp level. Lower the beam if the car is heavily laden.

1. Keep the engine running or the car’s electri- cal system in ignition position I.

2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/lower headlamp level.

The position in which the thumbwheel should be set for a number of load cases is shown below.

Examples of thumbwheel position.

Thumbwheel in position 0

Thumbwheel in position 1

Load case Thumb-

wheel

position

Only driver. 0

Driver and passenger in the front passenger seat.

0

Driver and passenger in the front passenger seat.

Three passengers in the rear seat.

1

Load case Thumb-

wheel

position

Driver and passenger in the front passenger seat.

Three passengers in the rear seat.

220 kg load in the cargo area.

1

Driver and maximum load in the cargo area.

2

Related information Lighting control (p. 146)

3 Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps.

LIGHTING

}}

149

Position lamps Position lamps can be used so that other road users can see the car if it stops or is parked. The position lamp is switched on with the rotating ring on the stalk switch.

Stalk switch rotating ring in position lamps position.

Turn the rotating ring to the position — the position lamps are switched on (number plate lighting is switched on at the same time).

If the car’s electrical system is in ignition position II then the daytime running lights are switched on instead of the front position lamps. When the rotating ring is in this position, the position lamps are switched on regardless of the ignition posi- tion of the car’s electrical system.

If the car is stationary but running, the rotating

ring can be moved to the position lamp

position from another position to switch on only the position lamps instead of other lighting.

When driving for more than 30 seconds at max. 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime running lights are switched on. The driver should

turn to a position other than .

If the tailgate is opened when it is dark outside, the rear position lamps come on (if not already switched on) to warn road users approaching from behind. This takes place irrespective of the position of the rotating ring or the ignition posi- tion of the car’s electrical system.

Related information Lighting control (p. 146)

Ignition positions (p. 410)

Replacing daytime running light bulb/posi- tion lamp bulb, front (p. 598)

Daytime running lights The car has sensors that detect the light condi- tions in the surroundings. The daytime running lights are switched on when the rotating ring on

the stalk switch is in position , or

as well as when the car’s electrical system

is in ignition position II. In position , the headlamps change automatically to dipped beam in weak daylight or darkness.

Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.

||

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory.150

If the stalk switch rotating ring is in the position, the daytime running lights (DRL4) are switched on when the car is driven in daylight. The car automatically changes lighting from day- time running light to dipped beam in weak day- light or darkness. Changing to dipped beam also takes place if the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog lamp are activated.

WARNING

This system help to save energy — it cannot determine in all situations when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and rain.

The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with the correct beam pattern for the traffic situation and in accord- ance with applicable traffic regulations.

Related information Lighting control (p. 146)

Ignition positions (p. 410)

Dipped beam (p. 150)

Replacing daytime running light bulb/posi- tion lamp bulb, front (p. 598)

Dipped beam When driving with the stalk switch’s rotating ring

in the position, dipped beam is activated automatically in weak daylight or darkness or when the car’s electrical system is in ignition position II.

Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.

With the stalk switch’s rotating ring in position, dipped beam is also activated automati- cally if:

the front fog lamps* are activated

the rear fog lamp is activated

the front and rear fog lamps are activated

With the stalk switch’s rotating ring in the position, dipped beam is always activated when the car’s electrical system is in ignition position II.

Tunnel detection The car detects when it is driven into a tunnel and switches from daytime running lights to dipped beam.

Note that the rotating ring in the left-hand stalk

switch must be in mode for tunnel detec- tion to work.

Related information Lighting control (p. 146)

Ignition positions (p. 410)

Daytime running lights (p. 149)

Replacing the dipped beam bulb (p. 597)

4 Daytime Running Lights

LIGHTING

}}

151

Using main beam Main beam is operated with the left-hand stalk switch. Main beam is the car’s strongest lighting and should be used when driving in the dark for better visibility, as long as it does not dazzle other road users.

Steering wheel stalk switch with rotating ring.

Main beam flash Move the stalk switch backwards slightly to main beam flash position. Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released.

Main beam Main beam can be activated when the steer- ing wheel stalk switch’s rotating ring is in

position 5 or . Activate main beam by moving the stalk switch forwards.

Deactivate by moving the stalk switch back- wards.

When main beam has been activated the symbol illuminates in the driver display.

Related information Lighting control (p. 146)

Active main beam (p. 151)

Replacing the main beam lamp (p. 598)

Active main beam Active main beam is a function which uses a camera sensor at the top edge of the wind- screen to detect the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and then switches from main beam to dipped beam.

The symbol represents active main beam.

The function can start while driving in the dark when the car’s speed is approx. 20 km/h (approx. 12 mph) or higher. The function can also take streetlights into account. When the camera sen- sor no longer detects any oncoming car or car in front, main beam is switched on again after about a second.

5 When dipped beam is activated.

||

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory.152

Activate active main beam Active main beam is activated and deactivated by turning the rotating ring on the right-hand stalk

switch to position . The rotating ring then

returns to position . When active main

beam is activated, the symbol illuminates with a white glow in the driver display. When main beam is activated, the symbol shines blue.

If active main beam is deactivated while main beam is on, the lighting is immediately reset to dipped beam.

Adaptive functionality For cars with LED6 headlamps*, active main beam has adaptive functionality7. In this case, unlike what happens during conventional dim- ming, the light beam continues to illuminate with main beam on both sides of oncoming traffic or vehicles ahead only the part of the light beam that points directly to the vehicle is dimmed.

Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly towards oncoming vehicle, but continued main beam on both sides of the vehicle.

The main beam is partly dimmed, i.e. if the light beam shines with slightly more than dipped

beam, the symbol in the driver display shines blue.

Limitations for active main beam The camera sensor on which the function is based has limitations.

If this symbol is shown in the driver dis- play, together with the message Active High Beam Temporarily unavailable, then switching between

main and dipped beam must be performed man-

ually. The symbol extinguishes when these message are shown.

The same applies if this symbol is shown together with the message Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner’s manual.

Active main beam may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When active main beam becomes available again, or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked,

the message goes out and the symbol illu- minates.

WARNING

Active main beam is an aid for using the opti- mum beam pattern when conditions are favourable.

The driver always bears responsibility for man- ually switching between main and dipped beam when traffic situations or weather con- ditions so require.

6 LED (Light Emitting Diode) 7 Depending on the car’s equipment level.

LIGHTING

153

Related information Lighting control (p. 146)

Using main beam (p. 151)

Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 333)

Using direction indicators The car’s direction indicators are operated with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator lamps flash three times or continuously, depend- ing on how far up or down the stalk switch is moved.

Direction indicators.

Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the first position and release. The direction indicator lamps flash three times. If the function is deactivated via the centre display, the lamps will flash once.

NOTE

This automatic flashing sequence can be stopped by moving the stalk switch immediately in the opposite direction.

If the symbol for direction indicators in the driver display flashes more quickly than normal — see the message in the driver display.

Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to its end position.

The stalk switch remains in its position and is moved back manually, or automatically by the steering wheel movement.

Related information Hazard warning flashers (p. 156)

Adjusting light functions via the centre dis- play (p. 147)

Replacing the front direction indicator bulb (p. 599)

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory.154

Active bending lights* Active bending lights are designed to provide maximum illumination in bends and junctions.

Cars with LED8 headlamps* can have active bending lights, depending on the car’s equip- ment level.

Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively.

Active bending lights follow steering wheel move- ments to provide maximum illumination in bends and junctions and can thereby provide the driver with improved visibility.

The function is activated automatically when the car is started. In the event of a fault in the func-

tion, the symbol illuminates in the driver display at the same time as the driver display shows an explanatory text.

The function is only active in weak daylight or darkness and only when the car is moving and dipped beam is switched on.

Deactivating/activating the function The function is activated when the car is supplied from the factory and can be deactivated/acti- vated via the centre display’s function view.

Press the Active Bending Lights button.

Related information Adjusting light functions via the centre dis-

play (p. 147)

Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 154)

Front fog lamps/cornering lights* The front fog lamps emit a stronger beam than dipped beam and are therefore additionally effective in fog.

Button for front fog lamps.

The rear fog lamps can only be switched on when the car’s electrical system is in ignition position II and the rotating ring on the stalk switch is in

position , or .

Press the button to activate and deactivate. The

symbol illuminates in the driver display when the front fog lamps are switched on.

The front fog lamps switch off automatically when the car is switched off or when the rotating ring

on the stalk switch is set to the position.

8 LED (Light Emitting Diode)

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory. 155

NOTE

Regulations on the use of fog lamps vary from country to country.

Cornering lights* The front fog lamps can include the cornering lights function, which temporarily illuminates the area diagonally in front of the car in the direction the steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or in the direction shown by the direction indicators.

The function is activated in weak daylight or dark- ness when the stalk switch’s rotating ring is in

the or position and the speed of the car is lower than approx. 30 km/h (approx. 20 mph).

In addition, both cornering lights are switched on as a supplement to the reversing lamp during reversing.

The function is activated when the car is supplied from the factory and can be activated and deacti- vated via the centre display.

Related information Lighting control (p. 146)

Ignition positions (p. 410)

Rear fog lamp (p. 155)

Active bending lights* (p. 154)

Adjusting light functions via the centre dis- play (p. 147)

Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp is considerably stronger than the normal rear lights and should only be used in reduced visibility due to fog, snow, smoke or dust so that other road users have an early warn- ing of a vehicle ahead.

Button for rear fog lamp.

The rear fog lamp is a lamp at the rear of the car, on the driver’s side.

The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when:

ignition position II is active and the rotating

ring on the stalk switch is in position

or

the stalk switch’s rotating ring is in position

and the front fog lamps are switched on.

Press the button to switch the lights on/off. The

symbol in the driver display illuminates when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically when:

the car is switched off or when the rotating

ring on the stalk switch is set to the position

the stalk switch’s rotating ring is in position

and the front fog lamps are switched off.

NOTE

Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary from country to country.

Related information Lighting control (p. 146)

Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 154)

Ignition positions (p. 410)

LIGHTING

156

Brake lights The brake light automatically comes on during braking.

The brake light is illuminated when the brake pedal is depressed and when the car is braked automatically by one of the driver support sys- tems.

Related information Emergency brake lights (p. 156)

Brake functions (p. 413)

Driving support systems (p. 282)

Emergency brake lights Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about heavy braking.

The function means that the brake light flashes instead of — as in normal braking — shining with a constant glow.

The emergency brake lights are activated during heavy braking or if the ABS system is activated at high speeds.

After the driver brakes to a low speed and then releases the brake, the brake light returns to nor- mal glow.

The car’s hazard warning flashers are activated at the same time. These flash until the driver accel- erates the car to a higher speed again or switches off the car’s hazard warning flashers.

Related information Brake lights (p. 156)

Foot brake (p. 413)

Hazard warning flashers (p. 156)

Hazard warning flashers Hazard warning flashers warn other road users by means of all of the car’s direction indicators being activated simultaneously. The function can be used to give a warning in the event of traffic hazards.

Button for hazard warning flashers.

Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers.

The hazard warning flashers are automatically activated when the car brakes so powerfully that the emergency brake lights are activated and the speed is low. The hazard warning flashers start to flash after the emergency brake lights have stop- ped flashing and are then deactivated automati- cally when the car drives away again or are deac- tivated if the button is depressed.

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory. 157

NOTE

Regulations for the use of hazard warning flashers may vary between countries.

Related information Emergency brake lights (p. 156)

Using direction indicators (p. 153)

Using home safe lighting Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked.

To activate the function:

1. Switch off the car.

2. Move the left-hand stalk switch forward toward the instrument panel and release.

3. Get out of the car and lock the door.

When the function is activated, a symbol illumi- nates in the driver display and position lamps, exterior handle lighting* and number plate light- ing are switched on.

The length of time that home safe lighting remains on can be set via the centre display.

Related information Adjusting light functions via the centre dis-

play (p. 147)

Approach light duration (p. 157)

Approach light duration Approach lighting is switched on when the car is unlocked and is used to switch on the car’s lighting at a distance.

The function is activated when the remote control key is used for unlocking. At which point, position lamps, exterior handle lighting*, number plate lighting, interior roof lamps, floor lamps and cargo area lighting are switched on. If a door is opened within the activation time, the time for the lighting in the outside handles* and the interior lighting will be extended.

The function can be activated and deactivated via the centre display.

Related information Adjusting light functions via the centre dis-

play (p. 147)

Using home safe lighting (p. 157)

Remote control key (p. 237)

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory.158

Interior lighting The interior is equipped with several different types of lighting to improve the experience. This includes, reading lamps, glovebox lighting and ground lighting.

All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on and off manually at least 5 minutes from when:

the car has been switched off and its electri- cal system is in ignition position 0

the car has been unlocked but it has not been started.

Front roof lighting

Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.

Reading lamp, left-hand side

Passenger compartment lighting

Auto function for passenger compartment lighting

Reading lamp, right-hand side

Reading lighting The reading lamps on the right and left-hand sides can be turned on and off by briefly pressing the buttons in the roof console. Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.

Passenger compartment lighting The floor lighting and interior roof lighting are switched on or off with a short press on the but- ton in the roof console.

Auto function for passenger compartment lighting The automatic function is activated by a short press on the AUTO button in the roof console. With the automatic system activated, the light indicator in the button illuminates and the pas- senger compartment lighting is switched on and off according to the following.

The passenger compartment lighting comes on when:

the car is unlocked

the car is switched off

a side door is opened

remains on for 2 minutes if one of the side doors is open.

The passenger compartment lighting goes off when:

the car is locked

the car is started

a side door is closed.

Rear roof lighting* The rear area of the car has reading lighting, which is also used as passenger compartment lighting.

Reading lamps above the rear seat.

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory. 159

In cars with panorama roof* there are two lamp units, one on each side of the roof.

The reading lamps are switched on or off by briefly pressing the button on the lamp. Bright- ness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.

Glovebox lighting Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respec- tively when the lid is opened or closed.

Sun visor mirror lighting* The lighting for the mirror in the sun visor is switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed.

Ground lighting* The ground lighting is switched on or off when the corresponding door is opened or closed.

Lighting in the cargo area The lighting in the cargo area is switched on or off when the tailgate is opened or closed.

Decor lighting The ambient light is switched on when you open the doors and is switched off when the car is locked. The intensity of the decor lighting can be adapted in the centre display and also precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel.

Ambience lights* The car is equipped with LEDs that make it pos- sible to change the colour of the light. These lights are switched on when the car is running. The ambience light can be adapted in the centre display and also precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel.

Lighting in storage compartments in doors The lighting in the storage compartments in the doors is switched on when you open the doors and is switched off when the car is locked. The brightness can be precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel.

Lighting in the tunnel console’s front cup holder The lighting in the front cup holders is switched on when the car is unlocked and is switched off when the car is locked. The brightness can be precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel.

Related information Adjusting interior lighting (p. 160)

Lighting control (p. 146)

Ignition positions (p. 410)

Passenger compartment interior (p. 562)

LIGHTING

* Option/accessory.160

Adjusting interior lighting The lamps inside the car come on differently depending on the ignition position used. The interior lighting can be adjusted with a thumb- wheel in the instrument panel, and certain light functions can also be adjusted via the centre display.

The thumbwheel on the instru- ment panel, to the left of the steering wheel, is used to adjust the brightness of the display light, control light, ambi- ent light and ambience light*

Adjusting ambient decor illumination 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre

display.

2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting Interior Lighting.

3. Choose between the following settings:

Under Ambient Light Intensity, select from Off, Low and High.

Under Ambient Light Level, select from Reduced and Full.

Adjusting ambience light* The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that make it possible to change the colour of the light. These lights are switched on when the car is run- ning.

Changing the brightness of the lights 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre

display.

2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting

Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.

3. Under Interior Mood Light Intensity, select from Off, Low and High.

Changing the colour of the light 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre

display.

2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting

Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.

3. Choose between By Temperature and By Colour in order to change the colour of the light.

With the By Temperature option, the light changes according to the set passenger compartment temperature.

With the By Colour option, the Theme Colours subcategory can be used to adjust further.

Related information Interior lighting (p. 158)

Adjusting light functions via the centre dis- play (p. 147)

Ignition positions (p. 410)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory.162

Windows, glass and mirrors The car contains controls for windows, glass and mirrors. Some of the windows in the car are laminated.

Laminated glass The windscreen has laminated glass, and lamina- ted glass is available as an option for certain other glass areas. Laminated glass is reinforced, which provides better protection against break- ins and improved sound insulation in the passen- ger compartment.

The panoramic roof* also has laminated glass.

The symbol is shown on the windows where the glass is laminated1

Related information Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds

(p. 162)

Panorama roof* (p. 168)

Power windows (p. 163)

Rearview and door mirrors (p. 165)

Head-up display* (p. 136)

Using windscreen wipers (p. 172)

Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 175)

Activating and deactivating the heated wind- screen* (p. 217)

Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 218)

Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds All power windows and sun blinds* have pinch protection which is deployed if they are blocked by any object while opening or closing.

In the event of blocking, the movement stops and then reverses automatically to approx. 50 mm (approx. 2 inches) from the blocked position (or to full ventilation position).

It is possible to force pinch protection when clos- ing has been cancelled, e.g. when ice is formed, by continuing to press the control in one and the same direction.

If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a reset sequence can be tested.

WARNING

If the starter battery is disconnected, the automatic opening and closing function must be reset to work properly. A reset must take place for pinch protection to work.

Related information Reset sequence for pinch protection

(p. 163)

Operating power windows (p. 164)

Panorama roof* (p. 168)

1 Does not apply to the windscreen or panorama roof* which are always laminated and thus do not have this symbol.

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory. 163

Reset sequence for pinch protection If a problem occurs with the electrical functions for the electric windows, a reset sequence can be tested.

WARNING

If the starter battery is disconnected, the automatic opening and closing function must be reset to work properly. A reset must take place for pinch protection to work.

If a problem persists, or if it concerns the panor- amic roof or sunroof, contact a workshop2.

Reset the power window 1. Start with the window in closed position.

2. Then operate the controls in the manual position 3 times upwards to closed position.

> The system is initialised automatically.

Related information Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds

(p. 162)

Operating power windows (p. 164)

Power windows The power windows are operated using the con- trol panels in each respective door. The driver’s door has controls for operating all windows and also to activate the child safety locks.

Driver’s door control panel.

Electric child safety locks* that deactivate the controls in the rear doors to prevent doors or windows from being opened from the inside.

Controls for rear windows.

Controls for front windows.

The power windows are equipped with pinch pro- tection. If any fault arises with the pinch protec- tion, a reset sequence can be tested.

WARNING

Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts.

Always operate the windows with caution.

Do not allow children to play with the controls.

Never leave children alone in the car.

Remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car’s electrical system in ignition posi- tion 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car.

Never put an object or part of the body through the windows, even if the car’s electrical system is fully disconnected.

Related information Operating power windows (p. 164)

Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 162)

Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 163)

2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory.164

Operating power windows Using the driver’s door control panel, all power windows can be operated — using the control panels in the other doors operates the power window in the individual door.

The power windows are equipped with pinch pro- tection. If any fault arises with the pinch protec- tion, a reset sequence can be tested.

WARNING

Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts.

Always operate the windows with caution.

Do not allow children to play with the controls.

Never leave children alone in the car.

Remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car’s electrical system in ignition posi- tion 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car.

Never put an object or part of the body through the windows, even if the car’s electrical system is fully disconnected.

Operating the power windows.

Operating without auto. Move one of the controls gently up or down. The power win- dows move up or down as long as the control is held in position.

Operating with auto. Move one of the con- trols up or down to the end position and release it. The window runs automatically to its end position.

In order for the power windows to be used, the ignition position must be I or II. The power win- dows can be operated for a few minutes after the car has been switched off and after the ignition has been switched off — although not after a door has been opened. It is only possible to operate one control at a time.

It can also be operated using a remote control key or keyless opening* with the door handle.

WARNING

Check that children or other passengers are not at risk of crushing when all the windows are closed with a remote control key or key- less opening* with a door handle.

NOTE

One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.

NOTE

The windows cannot be opened at speeds above approx. 180 km/h (approx. 112 mph), but they can be closed.

The driver always bears responsibility for fol- lowing traffic regulations in force.

NOTE

It may not be possible to operate windows at low temperatures.

Related information Power windows (p. 163)

Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 162)

Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 163)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory. 165

Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 261)

Locking and unlocking with the remote con- trol key (p. 239)

Rearview and door mirrors The rearview mirrors and door mirrors are used to give the driver better visibility to the rear.

Interior rearview mirror The interior rearview mirror is adjusted by angling it manually. The interior rearview mirror can be fit- ted with HomeLink*, automatic dimming* and compass*.

Door mirrors

WARNING

Both mirrors are bent to provide optimal vision. Objects may appear to be further away than they actually are.

The door mirror positions are adjusted with the joystick in the driver’s door control panel. There are also a number of automatic settings that can be linked to the memory function buttons for the power seat*.

Related information HomeLink* (p. 475)

Compass* (p. 479)

Adjusting rearview mirror dimming (p. 166)

Angling the door mirrors (p. 167)

Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 182)

Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 218)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory.166

Adjusting rearview mirror dimming Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirrors and dazzle the driver. Use dim- ming when disturbed by light from behind.

Manual dimming The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with a control in the mirror’s lower edge.

Control for manual dimming.

1. Use dimming by moving the control in towards the passenger compartment.

2. Return to normal mode by moving the control towards the windscreen.

The control for manual dimming is not available on mirrors with automatic dimming.

Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the interior rearview and door mirrors. Auto- matic dimming is always active while driving, apart from when gearbox reverse position is selected.

NOTE

When sensitivity is changed there is no imme- diately noticeable change in dimming, but the change takes place gradually.

Dimming sensitivity will affect both the interior rearview mirror and the door mirrors.

To change dimming sensitivity:

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press My Car Mirrors and Convenience.

3. Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming, select Normal, Dark or Light.

The interior rearview mirror contains two sensors — one forward facing and one rearward facing — that work together to identify and eliminate daz- zling light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient light, while the rearward facing sensor detects the light from vehicle headlights behind.

For the door mirrors to be equipped with auto- matic dimming, the interior rearview mirror must also be equipped with automatic dimming.

NOTE

If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in the seats or in the cargo area in such a way that light is prevented from reaching the sen- sors, then the dimming function of the interior rearview and door mirrors is reduced.

Related information Rearview and door mirrors (p. 165)

Angling the door mirrors (p. 167)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

}}

* Option/accessory. 167

Angling the door mirrors To ensure better visibility to the rear, the door mirrors need to be set to the preferences of the driver. There are a number of automatic settings that can also be linked to the memory function buttons for the power seat*.

Using controls for door mirrors

Controls for door mirrors.

The door mirror positions are adjusted with the joystick in the driver’s door control panel. Ignition position must be at least I.

1. Press the L button for the left-hand door mir- ror or the R button for the right-hand door mirror. The light in the button illuminates.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre.

3. Press the L or R button again. The light should no longer be illuminated.

Folding in rearview mirrors electrically* The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces.

1. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously.

2. Release them after approximately 1 second. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position.

Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automati- cally stop in the fully extended position.

Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset electrically to the neutral position for electric retracting/extending* to work correctly.

1. Fold in the door mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously.

2. Fold them out again by pressing the L and R buttons simultaneously.

3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.

The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.

Angling during parking3

A door mirror can be angled down for the driver to view the side of the road when parking, for example.

Engage reverse gear and press the L or R button.

Note that the button may need to be pressed twice, depending on whether it was already pre- selected. The button flashes when the door mir- ror is angled down. When reverse gear is disen- gaged, the door mirror automatically starts to return after approx. 3 seconds and then reaches its original position after approx. 8 seconds.

Automatic angling during parking3

With this setting, the door mirror is automatically angled down when reverse gear is selected. The folded position is preset and cannot be adjusted. You can make the door mirror return to its origi- nal position by pressing the L or R button twice.

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display’s top view.

2. Press My Car Mirrors and Convenience.

3. Under Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse, select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to activate/deactivate and to select which review mirror should be angled.

3 Only in combination with power seat with memory buttons*.

||

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory.168

Automatic retraction when locking* When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control key, the door mirrors can be automatically retracted/extended.

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display’s top view.

2. Press My Car Mirrors and Convenience.

3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to acti- vate/deactivate.

Related information Rearview and door mirrors (p. 165)

Adjusting rearview mirror dimming (p. 166)

Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 182)

Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 218)

Panorama roof* The panorama roof is divided into two glass sec- tions. The front section can be opened vertically at the rear edge (ventilation position) or horizon- tally (open position). The rear section is fixed roof glass.

The panoramic roof has a wind deflector and a sun blind made of perforated fabric and located under the glass roof to provide extra protection from factors such as strong sunlight.

The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated with a control located in the roof.

In order that the panoramic roof and the sun blind can be operated, the car’s electrical system must be in ignition position I or II.

WARNING

Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts.

Always operate the windows with caution.

Do not allow children to play with the controls.

Never leave children alone in the car.

Remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car’s electrical system in ignition posi- tion 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car.

Never put an object or part of the body through the windows, even if the car’s electrical system is fully disconnected.

IMPORTANT

Do not open the panoramic roof when load carriers are fitted.

Do not place any heavy objects on the panoramic roof.

IMPORTANT

Remove ice and snow before opening the panoramic roof. Take care not to scratch surfaces or damage strips.

Do not operate the panoramic roof if it has frozen closed.

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

}}

* Option/accessory. 169

Wind deflector

The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is raised when the panorama roof is in the open position.

Related information Operating the panorama roof* (p. 169)

Automatic closing of the panoramic roof’s* sun blind (p. 171)

Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 162)

Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 261)

Locking and unlocking with the remote con- trol key (p. 239)

Operating the panorama roof* The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated with a control in the roof panel and both are equipped with pinch protection.

WARNING

Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts.

Always operate the windows with caution.

Do not allow children to play with the controls.

Never leave children alone in the car.

Remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car’s electrical system in ignition posi- tion 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car.

Never put an object or part of the body through the windows, even if the car’s electrical system is fully disconnected.

IMPORTANT

Do not open the panoramic roof when load carriers are fitted.

Do not place any heavy objects on the panoramic roof.

IMPORTANT

Remove ice and snow before opening the panoramic roof. Take care not to scratch surfaces or damage strips.

Do not operate the panoramic roof if it has frozen closed.

In order that the panoramic roof and the sun blind can be operated, the car’s electrical system must be in ignition position I or II.

It can also be operated using a remote control key or keyless opening* with the door handle.

WARNING

Check that children or other passengers are not at risk of crushing when all the windows are closed with a remote control key or key- less opening* with a door handle.

IMPORTANT

Check that the panoramic roof is properly closed when closing.

The movement of the roof is stopped if the con- trol is released during manual operation, or when the glass reaches the comfort position4 or the maximum opening or closing position. The move-

4 Comfort position is a position where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving.

||

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

170

ment of both panoramic roof and sun blind are also stopped if the roof control is operated again in the opposite direction to the current direction of movement.

The panoramic roof and the sun blind are also equipped with pinch protection. If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a reset sequence can be tested.

NOTE

For manual opening, the sun blind must be fully open before the panoramic roof can be opened. When the procedure is reversed, the panoramic roof must be fully closed before the sun blind can be fully closed.

NOTE

It may not be possible to operate windows at low temperatures.

Open and close ventilation position

Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge.

Open by pressing the control upward once.

Close by pressing the control downward once.

When the ventilation position is selected the front glass cover is raised at its rear edge. If the sun blind is fully closed when ventilation position is selected, then it opens automatically approx. 50 mm (approx. 2 inches).

The sun blind follows automatically if the panor- amic roof is closed from ventilation position.

Fully open and close the panoramic roof using the roof control

Operation, manual mode

Operation, automatic mode

Manual operation 1. To open the sun blind — press the control

backwards to the position for manual open- ing.

2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort position — press the control backwards a second time to the position for manual opening.

3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum posi- tion — press the control backwards a third time to the position for manual opening.

Close by repeating the preceding procedure in reverse order — press the control forward/down- ward to the manual closing position instead.

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

}}

* Option/accessory. 171

Automatic operation 1. Open the sun blind to maximum position —

press the control backward to the position for automatic opening and release.

2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort position — press the control backwards a second time to the position for automatic opening and release.

3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum posi- tion — press the control backwards a third time to the position for automatic opening and release.

Close by repeating the preceding procedure in reverse order — press the control forward/down- ward to the automatic closing position instead.

Automatic operation — rapid opening or closing The panoramic roof and sun blind can be opened or closed simultaneously:

To open — press the control rearward to the automatic operation position twice and release.

To close — press the control forward/down- ward to the automatic operation position twice and release.

Related information Panorama roof* (p. 168)

Automatic closing of the panoramic roof’s* sun blind (p. 171)

Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 162)

Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 261)

Locking and unlocking with the remote con- trol key (p. 239)

Automatic closing of the panoramic roof’s* sun blind With this function, the sun blind is closed auto- matically 15 minutes after the car has been locked if it is parked in hot weather. This is in order to lower the passenger compartment tem- perature and protect the car’s upholstery from sun-fading.

The function is deactivated when the car is sup- plied from the factory and can be activated or deactivated in the centre display.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press My Car Locking.

Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to activate/deactivate.

NOTE

The sun blind is also closed when all windows are closed using the remote control key or keyless opening* with a door handle.

Related information Panorama roof* (p. 168)

Operating the panorama roof* (p. 169)

Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 162)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

* Option/accessory.172

Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 261)

Locking and unlocking with the remote con- trol key (p. 239)

Wiper blades and washer fluid Together with the washer fluid, the wipers are used to improve visibility as well as headlamp pattern.

Washer fluid direct from the wiper blades and heating* of the wiper blades gives improved vision.

Information indicating that the washer fluid needs topping up appears in the driver display when there is approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid remaining.

Related information Using the rain sensor (p. 173)

Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 175)

Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 177)

Using the rain sensor’s memory function (p. 174)

Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 176)

Filling washer fluid (p. 633)

Wiper blades in service position (p. 632)

Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 631)

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 630)

Using windscreen wipers (p. 172)

Using windscreen wipers The windscreen wipers clean the windscreen. Different settings for the windscreen wipers are set using the right-hand stalk switch.

Right-hand stalk switch.

The thumbwheel is used to set rain sensor sensitivity and wiper swipe frequency.

Single sweep Lower the stalk switch and release to make one sweep.

Windscreen wipers off Move the stalk switch to position 0 to switch off the windscreen wipers.

Intermittent wiping Set the number of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel when intermittent

wiping is selected.

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

}}

173

Continuous wiping Raise the stalk switch for the wipers to sweep at normal speed.

Raise the stalk switch further for the wip- ers to sweep at high speed.

IMPORTANT

Before activating the wipers — ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the windscreen and rear win- dow is scraped away.

IMPORTANT

Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.

Related information Using the rain sensor (p. 173)

Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 175)

Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 177)

Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 172)

Using the rain sensor’s memory function (p. 174)

Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 176)

Filling washer fluid (p. 633)

Wiper blades in service position (p. 632)

Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 631)

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 630)

Using the rain sensor The rain sensor automatically starts the wind- screen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen. Rain sensor sensitiv- ity can be adjusted with the thumbwheel on the right-hand stalk switch.

Right-hand stalk switch.

Rain sensor button

Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency

When the rain sensor is activated, the rain sensor

symbol is shown in the driver display.

Activating the rain sensor When activating the rain sensor, the car must be running or in ignition position I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch is in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep.

||

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

174

Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sen-

sor button .

Move the lever down to make the wipers move.

Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitiv- ity and downward for lower sensitivity. An extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upward.

Deactivating the rain sensor Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain

sensor button or moving the stalk switch up to another wiper program.

The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in ignition position 0 or when the engine is switched off.

The rain sensor is deactivated automatically when wiper blades are set in service position. The rain sensor is reactivated when service mode has been deactivated.

IMPORTANT

The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Deacti- vate the rain sensor while the car is running or when the car’s electrical system is in igni- tion position I or II. The symbol in the driver display extinguishes.

Related information Using windscreen and headlamp washers

(p. 175)

Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 177)

Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 172)

Using the rain sensor’s memory function (p. 174)

Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 176)

Filling washer fluid (p. 633)

Wiper blades in service position (p. 632)

Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 631)

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 630)

Using windscreen wipers (p. 172)

Using the rain sensor’s memory function The rain sensor automatically starts the wind- screen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen.

Activating/deactivating the memory function The memory function for the rain sensor can be activated in such a way that the rain sensor but- ton does not need to be depressed each time the car is started:

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press My Car Wipers.

3. Select Rain Sensor Memory to activate/ deactivate the memory function.

Related information Using the rain sensor (p. 173)

Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 175)

Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 177)

Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 172)

Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 176)

Filling washer fluid (p. 633)

Wiper blades in service position (p. 632)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

}}

* Option/accessory. 175

Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 631)

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 630)

Using windscreen wipers (p. 172)

Using windscreen and headlamp washers Windscreen and headlamp washers clean the windscreen and headlamps. Windscreen and headlamp washers are started using the right- hand stalk switch.

Starting windscreen and headlamp washers

Washing function, right-hand stalk switch.

Move the right-hand stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers.

> The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps once the stalk switch has been released.

IMPORTANT

Avoid activating the washer system when it is frozen or the washer reservoir is empty, other- wise there is a risk of damaging the pump.

Headlamp washing* To save fluid, the headlamps are washed auto- matically at a defined interval when the head- lamps are switched on.

Reduced washing If only approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid remains in the reservoir and the message Washer fluid Level low, refill, together with the

symbol, is shown in the driver display, then the supply of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off. This is to prioritise cleaning the windscreen and the visibility through it. The head- lamps are only washed if main or dipped beam is switched on.

Related information Using the rain sensor (p. 173)

Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 177)

Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 172)

Using the rain sensor’s memory function (p. 174)

Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 176)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

176

Filling washer fluid (p. 633)

Wiper blades in service position (p. 632)

Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 631)

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 630)

Using windscreen wipers (p. 172)

Using the rear window wiper and washer Rear window wiper and washer clean the rear window. Washing/wiping is started and settings are changed by means of the right-hand steering wheel stalk switch.

Activating the rear window wiper and washer

NOTE

The rear window wiper motor is equipped with overheating protection which means that it is switched off if it overheats. The rear window wiper works again after a cooling-down period.

Select for intermittent wiping with the rear window wiper.

Select for continuous speed with the rear window wiper.

Move the right-hand steering wheel stalk switch forward to start rear window washing and wiping.

Related information Using the rain sensor (p. 173)

Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 175)

Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 177)

Using the rain sensor’s memory function (p. 174)

Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 172)

Filling washer fluid (p. 633)

WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS

177

Wiper blades in service position (p. 632)

Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 631)

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 630)

Using windscreen wipers (p. 172)

Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wipers are on initiates rear window wiping. The function stops when reverse gear is disengaged.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press My Car Wipers.

3. Select Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deacti- vate wiping when reversing.

If the rear windscreen wiper is already operating at a constant speed, no change takes place when reverse gear is selected.

Related information Using the rain sensor (p. 173)

Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 175)

Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 172)

Using the rain sensor’s memory function (p. 174)

Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 176)

Filling washer fluid (p. 633)

Wiper blades in service position (p. 632)

Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 631)

Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 630)

Using windscreen wipers (p. 172)

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

* Option/accessory.180

Manual front seat The car’s front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort.

Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cush- ion* by pumping up/down.1

Change the length* of the seat cushion by pulling the lever up and moving the seat cushion forward/backward by hand.

Adjust the seat forward/backward by lifting the handle and adjusting the distance to the steering wheel and pedals. Check that the seat is locked after the position has been adjusted.

Change the lumbar support* by pressing the button upward/downward/forward/back2.

Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting the control up/down.

Change the backrest inclination by turning the control knob.

WARNING

Adjust the position of the driver’s seat before setting off, never while driving. Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the event of heavy braking or an accident.

Related information Power* front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)

Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 182)

Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 183)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 185)

Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 186)

Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 184)

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 187)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 187)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- er’s seat* (p. 189)

1 Only applies to the driver’s seat. 2 Applicable to four-way lumbar support*. Two-way lumbar support* is adjusted forwards/backwards.

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

}}

* Option/accessory. 181

Power* front seat The car’s front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort. The power seat can be moved forwards/backwards and upwards/downwards. The front edge of the seat cushion can be raised/lowered as well as adjusted in length* and the backrest inclination can be changed. The lumbar support* can be

adjusted upward/downward/forward/backward.3

Seat setup can take place when the engine is running and within a certain time after unlocking the door without the engine running. Adjustment can also be performed within a certain time after the engine has been switched off.

IMPORTANT

The power seats have overload protection that is triggered if any seat is blocked by an object. If this happens, remove the object and then move the seat again.

Related information Manual front seat (p. 180)

Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)

Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 182)

Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 183)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 185)

Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 186)

Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 184)

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 187)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 187)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- er’s seat* (p. 189)

Adjusting the power* front seat Set the preferred seat position using the control on the front seat’s seating section. To set the various comfort functions, turn the multifunction

control4 up/down.

The illustration shows the controls from a car with four- way lumbar support*. Cars with two-way lumbar support* do not have the rotatable multifunction control.

In cars with four-way lumbar support*, turn the multifunction control4 up/down to set the different comfort functions. In cars with two- way lumbar support*, use the round button to adjust the lumbar support forward/backward.

Raise/lower the seat cushion front edge by adjusting the control up/down.

Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting the control up/down.

3 Applicable to four-way lumbar support*. Two-way lumbar support* is adjusted forwards/backwards.

||

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

* Option/accessory.182

Move the seat forward/backward by adjust- ing the control forward/backward.

Change the backrest inclination by adjusting the control forward/backward.

Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) can be made at a time.

The backrests of the front seats cannot be low- ered fully forward.

Related information Manual front seat (p. 180)

Power* front seat (p. 181)

Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 182)

Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 183)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 185)

Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 186)

Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 184)

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 187)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 187)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- er’s seat* (p. 189)

Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* You can store the position for power* seat, door mirrors and head-up display* in the memory but- tons.

Store two different positions for the power* seat, the door mirrors and the head-up display* using the memory buttons. The buttons are located on the inside of one of the front doors or both*.

Button M for storing settings.

Memory button.

Memory button.

Storing a position 1. Adjust seat, door mirrors and head-up display

to the desired position.

2. Press and hold the M button depressed. The light indicator in the button illuminates.

3. Within three seconds, press and hold the 1 or 2 button.

> When the position has been stored in the selected memory button, an acoustic sig- nal can be heard and the light indicator in the M button extinguishes.

If none of the memory buttons is depressed within three seconds then the M button extin- guishes and no storing takes place.

The seat, the door mirrors or the head-up-display must be readjusted before a new memory can be set.

Related information Manual front seat (p. 180)

Power* front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)

Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 183)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 185)

Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 186)

4 Not available in cars with two-way lumbar support*.

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

}}

* Option/accessory. 183

Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 184)

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 187)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 187)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- er’s seat* (p. 189)

Angling the door mirrors (p. 167)

Settings for head-up display* (p. 138)

Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* If the positions for the power* seat, the door mir- rors and the head-up display* have been stored, they can be activated simply by using the mem- ory buttons.

Using a stored setting

A stored setting can be used with the front door either open or closed:

Open front door

Depress one of the memory buttons 1 ( )

or 2 ( ) with a short press. Power seat, door mirrors and head-up display move and then stop at the positions stored in the selected memory button.

Closed front door

Hold one of the memory buttons 1 ( ) or 2

( ) depressed until seat, door mirrors and head-up display stop in the positions that are stored in the selected memory button.

If the memory button is released, the movement of the seat, door mirrors and head-up display will be stopped.

WARNING

Because the driver’s seat can be adjusted with the ignition off, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle.

Movement of the seat can be STOPPED at any time by pressing any button on the power seat control panel.

Do not adjust the seat while driving.

Make sure there is nothing under the seats when they are being adjusted.

Related information Manual front seat (p. 180)

Power* front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)

Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 182)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 185)

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

* Option/accessory.184

Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 186)

Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 184)

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 187)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 187)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- er’s seat* (p. 189)

Angling the door mirrors (p. 167)

Settings for head-up display* (p. 138)

Massage settings* in the front seat Both the multi-function control on the side of the seat and the centre display can be used in order to change the settings. The range of settings is shown in the centre display.

Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat’s seating section.

Settings for massage The following setting options are available for massage:

On/Off: Select On/Off in order to switch on/off the massage function.

Programs 1-5: There are 5 preset massage programs. Select between Swell, Tread, Advanced, Lumbar and Shoulder.

Intensity: Select between Low, Normal and High.

Speed: Select between Slow, Normal and Fast.

Restarting massage The massage function is deactivated automati- cally after 20 minutes. Reactivation of the func- tion is performed manually.

Tap on Restart, which is shown in the centre display, to restart the selected massage pro- gram.

> The massage program restarts. If no action is taken, the message remains shown in the top view.

Related information Manual front seat (p. 180)

Power* front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)

Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 182)

Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 183)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 185)

Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 186)

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 187)

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

* Option/accessory. 185

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 187)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- er’s seat* (p. 189)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat Both the multi-function control on the seat and the centre display can be used in order to change the settings. The range of settings is shown in the centre display.

Adjusting massage settings in the front seat The front seat has massage in the backrest. The massage is performed by air cushions that can massage with different settings.

The massage function can only be activated when the car’s engine is running.

1. Activate the multi-function control by turning

the control upwards/downwards. The seat settings view will be shown in the centre display.

2. Select Massage in the seat settings view.

3. To choose between the different massage functions, select either directly in the centre display or by moving the cursor up/down

using the multi-function control’s upper /

lower button. Change the setting in the selected function directly in the centre dis- play, by pressing the arrows, or by using the

multi-function control’s front /rear button.

Related information Manual front seat (p. 180)

Power* front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)

Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 182)

Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 183)

Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 186)

Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 184)

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 187)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 187)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- er’s seat* (p. 189)

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

* Option/accessory.186

Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat Depending on equipment level selected, seat cushion length is adjusted either using the multi- function control* on the side of the seat’s seat cushion, or manually using a control on the front of the seat cushion.

Adjusting the length of the seat cushion using the multifunction control

Multifunction control, located on the side of the seat cushion.

1. Activate the multi-function control by turning

the control upwards/downwards. The seat settings view will be shown in the centre display.

2. Select Cushion extension in the seat set- tings view.

Press the front section of the four-way

button to extend the seat cushion.

Press the rear section of the four-way

button to retract the seat cushion.

Adjusting the length of the seat cushion manually

Control for seat cushion adjustment.

1. Grip the handle on the front of the seat and pull upwards.

2. Adjust the length of the seat cushion.

3. Release the handle and make sure that the seat cushion has reached the correct posi- tion.

Related information Manual front seat (p. 180)

Power* front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)

Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 182)

Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 183)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 185)

Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 184)

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 187)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 187)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- er’s seat* (p. 189)

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

}}

* Option/accessory. 187

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat Increase comfort in the front seat by adjusting the sides of the backrest.

Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat’s seating section.

The sides of the backrest can be adjusted to pro- vide side support. Both the multi-function control on the seat and the centre display can be used in order to change the settings. The range of set- tings is shown in the centre display.

To adjust the side support:

1. Activate the multi-function control by turning

the it up/down . The seat settings view will be shown in the centre display.

2. Select Side bolsters in the seat settings view.

Press the front section of the four-way

button to increase side support .

Press the rear section of the four-way

button to decrease side support .

Related information Manual front seat (p. 180)

Power* front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)

Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 182)

Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 183)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 185)

Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 186)

Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 184)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 187)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- er’s seat* (p. 189)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat The lumbar support is adjusted using a control on the side of the seat cushion.

Multifunction control in cars with four-way lumbar sup- port*.

Control in cars with two-way lumbar support*.

||

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

* Option/accessory.188

The lumbar support is adjusted using the multi- function control in cars with four-way lumbar sup- port*, or using the round button in cars with two- way lumbar support*. The control is located on the side of the seat’s seating section. Depending on the equipment level selected, the lumbar sup- port can be adjusted forward/back and up/down (four-way lumbar support) or forward/back (two- way lumbar support).

Adjust the lumbar support in the car using the four-way lumbar support

1. Activate the multi-function control by turning

the control upwards/downwards. The seat settings view will be shown in the centre display.

2. Select Lumbar in the seat settings view.

Press the round button up /down to move the lumbar support upwards/ downwards.

Press the front section of the button to increase lumbar support.

Press the rear section of the button to decrease lumbar support.

Adjust the lumbar support in the car using the two-way lumbar support

1. Press the front section of the round but- ton to increase lumbar support.

2. Press the rear section of the round but- ton to decrease lumbar support.

Related information Manual front seat (p. 180)

Power* front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)

Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 182)

Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 183)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 185)

Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 186)

Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 184)

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 187)

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv- er’s seat* (p. 189)

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

* Option/accessory. 189

Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver’s seat* The front passenger seat can be adjusted from the driver’s seat.

Activating the function The function is activated via the function view in the centre display:

Press the Adjust Passenger Seat button to activate.

Adjust passenger seat From activation of the function, the driver must adjust the passenger seat within 10 seconds. If no adjustment is made within this time the func- tion is deactivated.

The driver adjusts the passenger seat using the controls on the driver’s seat:

Move the passenger seat forward/backward by adjusting the control forward/backward.

Change the passenger seat’s backrest incli- nation by adjusting the control forward/back- ward.

Related information Manual front seat (p. 180)

Power* front seat (p. 181)

Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)

Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 182)

Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 183)

Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 185)

Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 186)

Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 184)

Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 187)

Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 187)

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

* Option/accessory.190

Lowering the backrests in the rear seat The rear seat’s backrest is divided into two parts. The two parts can be folded forward indi- vidually.

WARNING

Adjust the seat and fix it before driving away. Take care when adjusting the seat. Uncontrolled or careless adjustment can lead to trapping injuries.

When loading long objects, they must always be strapped in securely to avoid injury and damage during sudden braking.

Always switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading and unloading the car.

For cars with automatic gearbox, set the gear selector in P to prevent it from being moved by mistake.

IMPORTANT

There must be no objects on the rear seat when the backrest is to be folded down. The seat belts must not be connected either. Oth- erwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery.

IMPORTANT

The seat cushion on the integrated child seat* must be in the lowered position before lowering the rear seat backrest.

The armrest* for the centre seat must be raised before lowering the seat.

The through-load hatch in the rear seat must be closed before lowering.

NOTE

The front seats may need to be pushed for- wards, and/or the backrests adjusted upwards, in order that the rear backrests can be fully folded forward.

Lowering the backrest in a car using electronically-controlled lowering* If the car is equipped with electronic lowering of the rear seat, you can lower the seat using the buttons located in the cargo area. It is also possi- ble to fold down the rear seat using handles on the top of the seat.

WARNING

Pay attention that people are not at risk of being trapped during the automatic folding of the rear seat. Since this takes place automati- cally on the press of a button, no one must be on or too close to the rear seat.

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

}}

191

Lowering the backrest using buttons in the cargo area

To facilitate folding of the rear seat, the car must be stationary and the tailgate open. Ensure that there are no occupants or objects in the rear seat.

1. Lower the centre seat’s head restraint man- ually.

2. Hold the button for folding depressed. The buttons are marked L and R for left and right-hand backrest sections respectively.

3. The backrests release from the locks. The head restraints are lowered first, then the backrests are lowered automatically to hori- zontal position.

Lowering the backrests using handles in the rear seat

Ensure that there are no occupants or objects in the rear seat.

Lower the centre seat’s head restraint man- ually.

Pull the handles located on the car’s left and right-hand backrests forwards to fold down the left and right-hand part of the rear seat respectively.

> The backrests release from the locks. The head restraints are lowered first, then the backrests are lowered automatically to horizontal position.

Lowering the backrests manually If the car only allows the rear seat to be folded down manually, fold down the right and left-hand

sides of the seat with the handles in the rear seat.

Ensure that there are no occupants or objects in the rear seat.

Lower the centre seat’s head restraint man- ually.

||

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

* Option/accessory.192

Pull up the backrest’s locking handle while folding the backrest forward at the same time. The locking handle for the head restraints is pulled up automatically when the backrest is folded. A red indicator on the lock

catch shows that the backrest is no longer locked in place.

NOTE

When the backrests are lowered, the head restraints can accommodate the seat cushion of the seat being lowered. Adjust the head restraints on the seat being lowered to avoid material damage.

3. The backrest disengages from the lock and needs to be lowered manually to the horizon- tal position.

Raising the backrest Raising the backrest to upright position is carried out manually:

1. Move the backrest up/back.

2. Press the backrest until the lock engages.

3. Raise the head restraints manually.

4. If necessary, raise the centre seat’s head restraint.

WARNING

When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place.

WARNING

Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seat are locked properly after being folded up.

The head restraints of the outer seats must always be raised when there are passengers on any of the rear seats.

Related information Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat

(p. 192)

Private locking (p. 273)

Activating and deactivating private locking (p. 274)

Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat Adjust the centre seat head restraint according to the height of the passenger. Fold down the outer seat head restraints* to improve rearward visibility.

Adjust the head restraint for the centre seat

The centre seat’s head restraint must be adjusted according to the passenger’s height so that, if possible, the whole of the back of the head is covered. Slide it up manually as required.

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

}}

* Option/accessory. 193

To lower the head restraint, the button (see illus- tration) must be depressed while the restraint is carefully moved down.

WARNING

The centre seat head restraint must be in its lowest position when the centre seat is not used. When the centre seat is used, the head restraint must be correctly adjusted to the height of the passenger so that it covers the whole of the back of the head if possible.

Fold down the rear seat’s outer head restraints via the centre display* The outer head restraints can be retracted via the centre display’s function view. You can lower the head restraints in ignition position 0.

Press the Headrest Fold but- ton to activate/deactivate low- ering.

Move the head restraint back manually until a click is heard.

WARNING

Do not lower the outer head restraints if there are passengers in any of the outer rear seats.

WARNING

The head restraint must be in locked position after being folded up.

Fold down the rear seat’s outer head restraints using handles For cars with electronically controlled rear seat folding*, the outer head restraints can be folded using handles on the top side of the seat, see

figure . For cars without electronic folding, the outer head restraints are folded manually using the inner control on the upper side of the seat;

see figure .

||

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

* Option/accessory.194

Related information Lowering the backrests in the rear seat

(p. 190)

Steering wheel controls and horn The steering wheel houses the horn and con- trols for e.g. the driver support systems and voice recognition.

Keypads and paddles* in the steering wheel.

Controls for driver support systems5

Paddle shifter* for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox.

Controls for voice recognition and menu, message and phone handling.

Horn

The horn is located in the centre of the steering wheel.

Related information Steering lock (p. 195)

Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 195)

5 Speed Limiter, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Warning* and Pilot Assist.

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

}}

195

Steering lock The steering wheel lock makes it difficult to steer the car if it is stolen, for example. A mechanical noise can be perceived when the steering lock is locked or unlocked.

Activating the steering lock The steering lock is activated when the car is locked from the outside and the engine is switched off. If the car is left unlocked then the steering lock will be activated automatically after a while.

Deactivating the steering lock The steering lock is deactivated when the car is unlocked from outside. If the car is not locked, the steering wheel lock will be deactivated as long as the remote control key is in the passen- ger compartment and the car is started.

Related information Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 194)

Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 195)

Adjusting the steering wheel The steering wheel can be adjusted in different positions.

The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and for depth.

The steering wheel is adjusted in different ways depending on whether or not the car is equipped with knee airbag6.

WARNING

Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before driving away. The steering wheel must never be adjusted while driving.

With speed related power steering the level of steering force can be adjusted. Steering force is

regulated according to the car’s speed in order to give the driver enhanced road responsiveness.

Adjusting the steering wheel in a car with a knee airbag

Lever for steering wheel adjustment.

1. Push the lever forwards to release the steer- ing wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you.

3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you move the lever back.

6 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.

||

SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL

* Option/accessory.196

Adjusting the steering wheel in a car without a knee airbag

Lever for steering wheel adjustment.

1. Pull the lever backwards to release the steer- ing wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you.

3. Push the lever forwards to secure the steer- ing wheel. If the lever is stiff, press the steer- ing wheel lightly at the same time as you move the lever back.

Related information Steering lock (p. 195)

Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 194)

Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 181)

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.198

Climate The car is equipped with electronic climate con- trol. The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment.

All climate control system functions are con- trolled from the centre display and physical but- tons in the centre console.

Some functions for the rear seat can also be controlled from the climate controls* at the rear of the tunnel console.

Related information Climate zones (p. 198)

Climate control — sensors (p. 199)

Perceived temperature (p. 199)

Controlling climate control with voice recog- nition (p. 200)

Parking climate* (p. 224)

Heater* (p. 232)

Air quality (p. 201)

Air distribution (p. 204)

Climate controls (p. 209)

Climate zones The number of climate zones that the car is divi- ded into governs the options for setting different temperatures for different parts of the passenger compartment.

2-zone climate

Climate zones with 2-zone climate.

With 2-zone climate, the temperature in the pas- senger compartment can be set separately for the left and right-hand sides.

4-zone climate*

Climate zones with 4-zone climate.

With 4-zone climate the temperature in the pas- senger compartment can be set separately for the left and right-hand sides in both the front and rear seat.

Related information Climate (p. 198)

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory. 199

Climate control — sensors The climate control system has a number of sen- sors to help control the climate in the car.

Sensor location

Sun sensor — on the upper side of the instru- ment panel.

Moisture sensor — in the casing by the inte- rior rearview mirror.

Outside temperature sensor — in the right- hand door mirror.

Temperature sensor for the passenger com- partment — by the physical buttons in the centre console.

NOTE

Do not cover or block the sensors with cloth- ing or other objects.

With the Interior Air Quality System* there is also an air quality sensor that is fitted into the climate control system air intake.

Related information Climate (p. 198)

Interior Air Quality System* (p. 202)

Perceived temperature The climate control system regulates the climate in the passenger compartment based on the perceived temperature, not on actual tempera- ture.

The temperature you select in the passenger compartment corresponds to the physically per- ceived temperature as affected by factors such as the ambient temperature, air speed, humidity, solar radiation, etc. in and around the car at the time.

The system includes a sun sensor which detects on which side the sun is shining into the passen- ger compartment. This means that the tempera- ture can differ between the right and left-hand side’s air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on both sides.

Related information Climate (p. 198)

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.200

Controlling climate control with voice recognition1

Voice recognition commands for the climate control system to e.g. change temperature, acti- vate a heated seat* or change fan level.

Press and say one of the following com- mands:

«Climate» — starts a dialogue for climate control and shows examples of commands.

«Set temperature to X degrees» — sets the desired temperature.

«Raise temperature»/»Lower temperature» — raise/lower the temperature setting one step.

«Sync temperature» — synchronises the temperature for all climate zones in the car with the temperature set for the driver’s side.

«Air on feet»/»Air on body» — opens the desired air flow.

«Air on feet off»/»Air on body off» — closes the desired air flow.

«Set fan to max»/»Turn off fan» — changes the air flow to Max/Off.

«Raise fan speed»/»Lower fan speed» — raises/lowers the fan level one step.

«Turn on auto» — activates automatic regula- tion of the climate control.

«Air condition on»/»Air condition off» — activates/deactivates the air conditioning.

«Recirculation on»/»Recirculation off» — activates/deactivates the air circulation.

«Turn on defroster «/»Turn off defroster» — activates/deactivates defrosting of windows and door mirrors.

«Turn on max defroster»/»Turn max defroster off» — activates/deactivates the max defroster.

«Turn on electric defroster»/»Turn off electric defroster» — activates/deactivates the heated windscreen*.

«Turn on rear defroster»/»Turn off rear defroster» — activates/deactivates the heated rear window and door mirrors.

«Turn steering wheel heat on»/»Turn steering wheel heat off» — activates/deac- tivates the heated steering wheel*.

«Raise steering wheel heat»/»Lower steering wheel heat» — raises/lowers the setting for the heated steering wheel* one step.

«Turn on seat heat»/»Turn off seat heat» — activates/deactivates the heated seat*.

«Raise seat heat»/»Lower seat heat» — raises/lowers the setting for the heated seat* one step.

«Turn on seat ventilation»/»Turn off seat ventilation» — activates/deactivates the seat ventilation*.

«Raise seat ventilation»/»Lower seat ventilation» — raises/lowers the setting for the ventilated seat* one step.

Related information Climate (p. 198)

Voice recognition (p. 139)

Using voice recognition (p. 140)

Settings for voice recognition (p. 143)

1 Applies to certain markets.

CLIMATE

}}

* Option/accessory. 201

Air quality The materials selected for the passenger com- partment and the air cleaning system ensure that the air quality in the passenger compartment is high.

Materials in the passenger compartment The interior of the passenger compartment is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.

Tested materials have been developed in order to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger compartment and to contribute to making the passenger compartment easier to keep clean.

The carpets in both the passenger compartment and the cargo area are removable and easy to remove and clean.

Use cleaning agents and car care products rec- ommended by Volvo to clean the interior.

Air cleaning system In addition to the passenger compartment filter, Clean Zone Interior Package* and the Interior Air Quality System* also help to maintain high air quality in the passenger compartment.

Related information Climate (p. 198)

Clean Zone* (p. 201)

Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 202)

Interior Air Quality System* (p. 202)

Passenger compartment filter (p. 203)

Clean Zone* The Clean Zone function checks and indicates whether or not all conditions have been met for good air quality in the passenger compartment.

The indicator is visible in the climate view in the centre display.

The indicator is visible in the climate row when the climate view is not open.

If the conditions have not been met then the Clean Zone text is white. When all conditions have been met, this is indicated by the text changing colour to blue.

Conditions that need to be met:

That all doors and the tailgate are closed.

That all side windows and the panorama roof* are closed.

||

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.202

That the air quality system Interior Air Quality System* is activated.

That the ventilation fan is activated.

That the air recirculation is deactivated.

NOTE

Clean Zone does not indicate that the air quality is good. It only indicates that the con- ditions for good air quality have been met.

Related information Air quality (p. 201)

Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 202)

Interior Air Quality System* (p. 202)

Passenger compartment filter (p. 203)

Clean Zone Interior Package* Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) comprises a series of modifications that keep the passen- ger compartment even clearer from allergy and asthma-inducing substances.

The following is included:

An enhanced fan function that means that the fan starts when the car is unlocked with the remote control key. The fan fills the pas- senger compartment with fresh air. The func- tion starts when required and is disengaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened. The amount of time the fan runs is reduced gradually due to reduced need up until the car is 4 years old.

The fully automatic air quality system Interior Air Quality System (IAQS).

Related information Air quality (p. 201)

Clean Zone* (p. 201)

Interior Air Quality System* (p. 202)

Passenger compartment filter (p. 203)

Interior Air Quality System*

Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully auto- matic air quality system that separates gases and particles to reduce the levels of odours and contaminants in the passenger compartment.

IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) and cleans the air in the passen- ger compartment from contaminants such as par- ticles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground- level ozone.

If the air quality sensor senses that the outside air is contaminated, the air intake is closed and air recirculation is activated.

NOTE

The air quality sensor must always be enabled to ensure the best air in the passenger com- partment.

In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as to prevent misting.

In the event of misting, the defrost functions for windscreen, side windows and rear win- dow should be used.

Related information Activating and deactivating the air quality

sensor* (p. 203)

Air quality (p. 201)

Clean Zone* (p. 201)

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory. 203

Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 202)

Passenger compartment filter (p. 203)

Activating and deactivating the air quality sensor* The air quality sensor is part of the fully auto- matic air quality system Interior Air Quality System (IAQS).

It is possible to set whether the air quality sensor should be activated/deactivated.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Climate.

3. Select Air Quality Sensor to activate/deac- tivate the air quality sensor.

Related information Interior Air Quality System* (p. 202)

Passenger compartment filter All air entering the car’s passenger compartment is cleaned with a filter.

Replacing the passenger compartment filter To maintain high climate system performance, the filter must be changed at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the rec- ommended replacement intervals. If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter more often.

NOTE

There are different types of passenger com- partment filter. Make sure that the correct fil- ter is fitted.

Related information Air quality (p. 201)

Clean Zone* (p. 201)

Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 202)

Interior Air Quality System* (p. 202)

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.204

Air distribution The climate control system distributes the incoming air via a number of different vents in the passenger compartment.

Automatic and manual air distribution With auto-regulated climate control running the air distribution takes place automatically. If nec- essary, the air distribution can be controlled man- ually.

Adjustable air vents Some of the air vents in the car are adjustable, which means that you can open/close the vent to aim the air flow.

Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger com- partment.

With 2-zone climate — four on the instrument panel and one on each of the door pillars between the front and rear doors.

Addition with 4-zone climate* — two at the rear of the tunnel console.

Related information Climate (p. 198)

Changing air distribution (p. 204)

Opening, closing and aiming the air vents (p. 205)

Table of air distribution options (p. 206)

Changing air distribution The air distribution can be changed manually if required.

1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the cli- mate row.

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory. 205

The air distribution buttons in the climate view.

Air distribution — windscreen defroster vents

Air distribution — air vents in instrument panel and centre console

Air distribution — air vents in the floor

2. Press one or more of the air distribution but- tons in order to open/close the correspond- ing air flow.

> The air distribution is changed and the buttons illuminate/extinguish.

Related information Air distribution (p. 204)

Opening, closing and aiming the air vents (p. 205)

Table of air distribution options (p. 206)

Opening, closing and aiming the air vents Some air vents in the passenger compartment can be opened, closed and aimed individually.

If the car’s outer vents are aimed at the side win- dows then misting can be eliminated.

If the car’s outer vents are aimed inwards then, in a hot climate, a comfortable environment is obtained in the passenger compartment.

Opening and closing the air vents Air vents on the instrument panel:

Turn the rotary knob in the middle of the air vent to open/close the air flow from the vent.

The air flow is at maximum when the marking on the knob is in vertical position.

Air vents on the door pillars and at the rear of the tunnel console*:

Roll the thumbwheel under the air vent in order to open/close the air flow from the vent.

The longer the white lines on the thumb- wheel that are visible, the higher the air flow.

Aiming the air vents Move the lever in the middle of the air vent

horizontally/vertically to direct the air flow from the vent.

Related information Air distribution (p. 204)

Changing air distribution (p. 204)

Table of air distribution options (p. 206)

CLIMATE

206

Table of air distribution options The air distribution can be changed manually if required. The following options are available for setting.

Air distribution Purpose

If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system returns to automatically regulated climate control.

Main air flow from the defroster vents. Some air flows from other air vents. Counteracts misting and icing in a cold and humid climate (to achieve this, fan level must not be low).

Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from other air vents.

Provides efficient cooling in a hot climate.

Main air flow from the air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air vents.

Provides heat or cooling to the floor.

CLIMATE

}}

207

Air distribution Purpose

Main air from the defroster vents and air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from other air vents.

Provides good comfort in hot and dry climates.

Main air flow from the defroster vents and air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air vents.

Provides good comfort and good demisting in a cold or humid climate.

Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air vents.

Provides good comfort in sunny weather with cool outdoor temperatures.

Main air flow from the defroster vents, from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the floor.

Gives balanced comfort in the passenger compartment.

||

CLIMATE

208

Related information Air distribution (p. 204)

Opening, closing and aiming the air vents (p. 205)

Changing air distribution (p. 204)

CLIMATE

}}

* Option/accessory. 209

Climate controls The climate control system’s functions are con- trolled from physical buttons in the centre con- sole, the centre display and the climate controls at the rear of the tunnel console*.

Physical buttons in centre console

Button for heated windscreen* and max defroster.

Button for heated rear window and door mir- rors.

Climate row in centre display The most common climate functions can be regulated from the climate row.

Temperature controls for driver and passen- ger side.

Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver and front passenger seat, as well as heated steering wheel*.

Button for access to the climate view. The graphic on the button shows activated cli- mate settings.

Climate view in centre display Open climate view by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row.

Depending on equipment level, the cli- mate view can be divided into several tabs. Change between the tabs by swiping left/right or by pressing the respective heading.

Main climate In addition to the climate row’s functions, other main climate functions can also be controlled in the Main climate tab.

Max, Electric, Rear — Controls for defrosting the windows and door mirrors.

AC — Controls for air conditioning.

Recirc — Controls for air recirculation.

||

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.210

Controls for air distribution.

Fan controls for front seat2.

AUTO — Auto regulating the climate.

Rear climate control* All climate functions for the rear seat can be regulated in the Rear climate tab.

2nd row climate — Controls for climate func- tionality in the rear seat. Fan controls for rear seat.

Temperature controls for rear seat.

Controls for heated rear seat*.

Parking climate* The car’s parking climate control can be regula- ted in the Parking climate tab.

Climate controls at rear of tunnel console*

Controls for heated rear seat*.

Fan controls for rear seat.

Temperature controls for rear seat.

Locking/unlocking button on the climate panel.

If the car is not equipped with a climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console, but has heated rear seats*, there are physical buttons at the rear of the tunnel console for controlling this function.

The climate panel has a screen lock to prevent unintentional change of fan speed and tempera- ture. When the screen is locked, only the seat controls* and the unlocking button are shown.

2 With a 2-zone climate, the controls are shared with the rear seat.

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory. 211

After unlocking, the fan speed and temperature can be changed via the climate panel and all selected climate settings are shown. The screen locks automatically after a period of inactivity.

Related information Climate (p. 198)

Activating and deactivating heated front seat* (p. 211)

Activating and deactivating heated rear seat* (p. 212)

Activating and deactivating ventilated front seat* (p. 213)

Activating and deactivating the heated steer- ing wheel* (p. 214)

Activating auto climate control (p. 214)

Activating and deactivating air recirculation (p. 215)

Activating and deactivating max defroster (p. 216)

Activating and deactivating the heated wind- screen* (p. 217)

Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 218)

Regulating fan level for front seat (p. 219)

Regulating fan level for rear seat* (p. 220)

Synchronising temperature (p. 223)

Activating and deactivating air conditioning (p. 224)

Activating and deactivating heated front seat* The seats can be heated in order to increase comfort for driver and passengers when it is cold.

1. Press the left or right-hand side’s steering wheel and seat button in the climate row in the centre display in order to open the con- trols for seat and steering wheel.

If the car is not equipped with ventilated seats or heated steering wheel (for the driv- er’s side), the button for heated seats is immediately available in the climate row.

2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.

> The level changes and the button shows the set level.

WARNING

Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the con- trols for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.

Related information Climate controls (p. 209)

Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated front seat* (p. 212)

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.212

Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated front seat* The seats can be heated in order to increase comfort for driver and passengers when it is cold.

It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated seats should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start in the event of low ambient temperature.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Climate.

3. Select Auto Driver Seat Heating Level and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level to activate/deactivate automatic start of heated driver’s and passenger seat.

> An «A» is shown at each button for heated front seats in the climate row when auto- matic starting has been activated.

4. Select Low, Medium or High to select level after the function has been activated.

Related information Climate controls (p. 209)

Activating and deactivating heated front seat* (p. 211)

Activating and deactivating heated rear seat* The seats can be heated in order to increase comfort for driver and passengers when it is cold.

Activating and deactivating the heated rear seat from the front seat*

1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the cli- mate row.

2. Select the Rear climate tab.

3. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.

> The level changes and the button shows the set level.

Activating and deactivating the heated rear seat from the rear seat With 2-zone climate:

Buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel con- sole.

Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand side’s physical buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel console to switch between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.

> The level changes and the LEDs in the button show the set level.

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory. 213

With 4-zone climate*:

Seat heating indication and controls on the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console.

Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand side’s buttons for heated seats on the tunnel console’s climate panel to switch between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.

> The level changes and the screen in the climate panel shows the set level.

WARNING

Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the con- trols for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries.

Related information Climate controls (p. 209)

Activating and deactivating ventilated front seat* The seats can be ventilated to provide increased comfort in a hot climate, for example.

The ventilation system consists of fans in the seats and backrests that draw air through the seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases the cooler the passenger compartment air becomes. The system can be activated when the engine is running.

1. Press the left or right-hand side’s steering wheel and seat button in the climate row in the centre display in order to open the con- trols for seat and steering wheel.

If the car is not equipped with heated seats or heated steering wheel (for the driver’s side), the button for ventilated seats is imme- diately available in the climate row.

2. Repeatedly press the button for ventilated seats in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.

> The level changes and the button shows the set level.

Related information Climate controls (p. 209)

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.214

Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* The steering wheel can be heated in order to increase comfort for the driver when it is cold.

1. Press the driver’s side steering wheel and seat button in the climate row of the centre display in order to open the controls for seat and steering wheel.

If the car is not equipped with heated seats or ventilated seats, the button for heated steering wheel is immediately available in the climate row.

2. Repeatedly press the button for heated steering wheel in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low.

> The level changes and the button shows the set level.

Related information Climate controls (p. 209)

Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated steering wheel* (p. 214)

Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated steering wheel* The steering wheel can be heated in order to increase comfort for the driver when it is cold.

It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated steering wheel should be activated/deac- tivated when the engine is started. With auto- matic start activated, heating will start in the event of low ambient temperature.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Climate.

3. Select Auto Steering Wheel Heating Level to activate/deactivate automatic start of heated steering wheel.

> An «A» is shown at the button for heated steering wheel in the climate row when automatic starting has been activated.

4. Select Low, Medium or High to select level after the function has been activated.

Related information Activating and deactivating the heated steer-

ing wheel* (p. 214)

Activating auto climate control With auto climate control activated, multiple cli- mate functions are controlled automatically.

1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the cli- mate row.

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory. 215

2. Give a short or long press on AUTO Climate.

Short press — air recirculation, air condi- tioning and air distribution are controlled automatically.

Long press — air recirculation, air condi- tioning and air distribution are controlled automatically, temperature and fan speed are changed to standard settings: 22 C (72 F) and level 3 (level 2 in the rear seat3).

> Auto-regulation of the climate is activated and the button illuminates.

NOTE

Temperature and fan speed can be changed without deactivating the automatically-regula- ted climate control system. The automatically- regulated climate control system is deacti- vated when the air distribution is changed manually or when maximum defroster is acti- vated.

Related information Climate controls (p. 209)

Activating and deactivating air recirculation Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate control system reusing the air in the passenger compartment.

1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the cli- mate row.

2. Press Recirc.

> Air recirculation is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.

IMPORTANT

If the air in the car is recirculated for too long then there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.

NOTE

It is not possible to activate air recirculation when max defroster is activated.

Related information Climate controls (p. 209)

Activating and deactivating time setting for air recirculation (p. 216)

3 For cars with 4-zone climate*.

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.216

Activating and deactivating time setting for air recirculation Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate control system reusing the air in the passenger compartment.

It is possible set whether the air recirculation timer should be activated/deactivated. When the timer is activated, air recirculation is automatically switched off after 20 minutes.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Climate.

3. Select Recirculation Timer to activate/ deactivate the air recirculation timer.

Related information Activating and deactivating air recirculation

(p. 215)

Activating and deactivating max defroster Max defroster is used to quickly remove mist and ice from windows.

Max defroster deactivates auto-regulation of the climate and air recirculation, activates air condi- tioning and changes the fan level to 5 and the temperature to HI.

NOTE

Changing the fan level to 5 increases the noise level.

When max defroster is deactivated, the climate control system returns to the previous settings.

Activating and deactivating max defroster from centre console There is a physical button in the centre console for quick access to max defroster.

With heated windscreen* the max defroster can only be activated individually from the climate view in the centre display.

Physical button in the centre console.

Cars without heated windscreen:

Press the button.

> Max defroster is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.

Cars with heated windscreen:

Press the button repeatedly in order to switch between the three levels:

Activated heated windscreen

Activated heated windscreen and max defroster

Deactivated.

> Heated windscreen and max defroster are activated/deactivated and the button illu- minates/extinguishes.

CLIMATE

}}

* Option/accessory. 217

NOTE

Max defroster starts with a certain delay in order to avoid a short increase in fan level if the heated windscreen is deactivated by two quick presses of the button.

Activating and deactivating max defroster from centre display

1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the cli- mate row.

2. Press Max.

> Max defroster is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.

Related information Climate controls (p. 209)

Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* A heated windscreen is used to quickly remove mist and ice from the window.

Activating and deactivating heated windscreen from centre console In the centre console is a physical button for rapid access to the heated windscreen.

Physical button in the centre console.

Press the button repeatedly in order to switch between the three levels:

Activated heated windscreen

Activated heated windscreen and max defroster

Deactivated.

> Heated windscreen and max defroster are activated/deactivated and the button illu- minates/extinguishes.

Activating and deactivating heated windscreen from centre display

1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the cli- mate row.

2. Press Electric.

> Heated windscreen is activated/deacti- vated and the button illuminates/extin- guishes.

NOTE

A triangular area at the end of each side of the windscreen is not electrically heated, where de-icing may take longer.

NOTE

The heated windscreen may affect the per- formance of transponders and other commu- nication equipment.

||

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.218

NOTE

If the heated windscreen is activated when the Start/Stop function has auto-stopped the engine then the engine will be restarted.

Related information Climate controls (p. 209)

Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated windscreen* (p. 218)

Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated windscreen* A heated windscreen is used to quickly remove mist and ice from the window.

It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated windscreen should be activated/deacti- vated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start when there is a risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The heating switches off automatically when the windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the ice or misting is gone.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Climate.

3. Select Auto Front Defroster to activate/ deactivate automatic start of heated wind- screen.

Related information Activating and deactivating the heated wind-

screen* (p. 217)

Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors The heated rear window and door mirrors are used to quickly remove mist and ice from the windows and mirrors.

Activating and deactivating heated rear window and door mirrors from centre console In the centre console is a physical button for rapid access to the heated rear window and door mirrors.

Physical button in the centre console.

Press the button.

> Heated rear window and door mirrors are activated/deactivated and the button illu- minates/extinguishes.

CLIMATE

}}

219

Activating and deactivating heated rear window and door mirrors from centre display

1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the cli- mate row.

2. Press Rear.

> Heated rear window and door mirrors are activated/deactivated and the button illu- minates/extinguishes.

Related information Climate controls (p. 209)

Activating and deactivating automatic star- ting of the heated rear window and door mir- rors (p. 219)

Activating and deactivating automatic starting of the heated rear window and door mirrors The heated rear window and door mirrors are used to quickly remove mist and ice from the windows and mirrors.

It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated rear window and door mirrors should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start when there is a risk of ice or misting on the wind- screen/window. The heating switches off auto- matically when the windscreen/window is suffi- ciently warm and the ice or misting is gone.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Climate.

3. Select Auto Rear Defroster to activate/ deactivate automatic start of heated rear window and door mirrors.

Related information Activating and deactivating the heated rear

window and door mirrors (p. 218)

Regulating fan level for front seat4

The fan can be set to several different automati- cally controlled fan speeds for the front seat.

1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the cli- mate row.

Fan control buttons in the climate view.

2. Tap on the desired fan level, Off, 1-5 or Max.

> Fan level is changed and the buttons for the selected level illuminate.

4 For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.

||

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.220

IMPORTANT

If the fan is fully switched off then the air con- ditioning is not engaged, which results in a risk of misting on the insides of the windows.

NOTE

The climate control system automatically adjusts the air flow within the selected fan level based on requirements. This means that the fan speed may change even though the fan level is the same.

Related information Climate controls (p. 209)

Regulating fan level for rear seat* The fan can be set to several different automati- cally controlled fan speeds for the rear seat.

Regulating the fan level for the rear seat from the front seat

1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the cli- mate row.

2. Select the Rear climate tab.

The fan control buttons in the tab Rear climate in the climate view.

3. Tap on the desired fan level, 1-5.

The rear seat’s fan level can be switched off by tapping on 2nd row climate.

> Fan level is changed and the buttons for the selected level illuminate.

Regulating the fan level for the rear seat from the rear seat 1. Press the unlocking button on the tunnel

console climate panel to access the controls.

CLIMATE

}}

221

Fan controls on the climate panel at the rear of the tun- nel console.

2. Tap on the desired fan level, 1-5.

> Fan level is changed and the buttons for the selected level illuminate.

NOTE

The fan level for the rear seat cannot be set if the fan level for the front seat is in position Off.

The rear seat fan speed can only be switched off from the climate view in the centre display.

NOTE

The climate control system automatically adjusts the air flow within the selected fan level based on requirements. This means that the fan speed may change even though the fan level is the same.

Related information Climate controls (p. 209)

Regulating temperature for front seat5

The temperature can be set to the desired num- ber of degrees for the front seat’s climate zones.

Temperature buttons in the climate row.

1. Press the left or right-hand side temperature button in the centre display’s climate row to open the controls.

5 For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.

||

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.222

Temperature control.

2. Regulate the temperature by either of the following:

drag the control to the desired tempera- ture, or

press +/ to raise/lower the temperature gradually.

> The temperature changes and the button shows the set temperature.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature.

Related information Climate controls (p. 209)

Regulating temperature for rear seat* The temperature can be set to the desired num- ber of degrees for the rear seat’s climate zones.

Regulating temperature for rear seat from front seat

1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the cli- mate row.

2. Select the Rear climate tab.

Temperature buttons in the Rear climate tab in the climate view.

3. Press the left or right-hand side temperature button to open the control.

Temperature control.

4. Regulate the temperature by means of the following:

drag the control to the desired tempera- ture

press +/ to raise/lower the temperature gradually.

> The temperature changes and the button shows the set temperature.

Regulating temperature for rear seat from rear seat 1. Press the unlocking button on the tunnel

console climate panel to access the controls.

CLIMATE

223

Temperature control on the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console.

2. Press the left or right-hand side buttons on the tunnel console’s climate panel in order to lower/raise the temperature gradu- ally.

> The temperature changes and the screen in the climate panel shows the set tem- perature.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature.

Related information Climate controls (p. 209)

Synchronising temperature The temperature in the car’s different climate zones can be synchronised with the temperature set on the driver’s side.

Synchronisation button on the driver’s side temperature controls.

1. Press the driver’s side temperature button in the centre display’s climate row in order to open the controls.

2. Press Synchronise temperature.

> The temperature for all zones in the car is synchronised with the temperature set for the driver’s side and the synchronisation symbol is shown adjacent to the tempera- ture button.

The synchronisation is stopped by means of a further press on Synchronise temperature or by means of changing the temperature settings for a climate zone other than the driver’s.

Related information Climate controls (p. 209)

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.224

Activating and deactivating air conditioning The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies incoming air as required.

When the air conditioning is activated, the climate control system automatically controls starting and switching off as required.

1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the cli- mate row.

2. Press AC.

> The air conditioning is activated/deacti- vated and the button illuminates/extin- guishes.

NOTE

Close all side windows and the panoramic roof* for air conditioning to work optimally.

NOTE

It is not possible to activate the air condition- ing when the fan control is in Off position.

Related information Climate controls (p. 209)

Parking climate* Parking climate control is a generic term for vari- ous functions that improve the passenger com- partment climate when the car is parked, e.g. preconditioning.

Functions belonging to the parking cli- mate control are controlled from the Parking climate in climate view in the centre display. Open climate view by

pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row.

Related information Climate (p. 198)

Preconditioning* (p. 225)

Climate comfort when parking* (p. 229)

Symbols and messages for parking climate control* (p. 231)

CLIMATE

}}

* Option/accessory. 225

Preconditioning* Preconditioning is a climate function which, if possible, attempts to reach comfort temperature in the passenger compartment before departure.

Preconditioning can use direct start or be set via the timer.

The function utilises several systems in different cases:

In a cold climate, the parking heater* warms up the passenger compartment to a comfort- able temperature.

When it is warm, the ventilation cools the passenger compartment by blowing in air from outside the car.

NOTE

During preconditioning of the passenger compartment, the car works to reach comfort temperature and not the temperature set in the climate control system.

Related information Parking climate* (p. 224)

Start and switch off preconditioning* (p. 225)

Preconditioning time setting* (p. 226)

Start and switch off preconditioning* Preconditioning heats* or ventilates the passen- ger compartment, if possible, prior to driving. The function can use direct start from the centre display or a mobile phone.

Start and switch off from car

1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the cli- mate row.

2. Select the Parking climate tab.

3. Press Preconditioning.

> Preconditioning is started/switched off and the button is illuminated/extin- guished.

NOTE

The car’s doors and windows should be closed during the preconditioning of the pas- senger compartment.

WARNING

Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip- ped with a heater*:

In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts.

In locations with combustible or flamma- ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.

When there is a risk that the heaters exhaust line may be blocked. For exam- ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand wheel housing can obstruct the heaters ventilation.

Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance.

Starting from the app* Start of preconditioning and information about the selected settings can be managed from a device that has the Volvo On Call* app. Precondi- tioning heats* the passenger compartment to a comfortable temperature or ventilates the pas- senger compartment by blowing in air from out- side.

The passenger compartment can also be precon- ditioned with the car remote start function (Engine Remote Start — ERS)6 via the Volvo On Call* app.

6 Certain markets.

||

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.226

Related information Parking climate* (p. 224)

Preconditioning* (p. 225)

Preconditioning time setting* (p. 226)

Preconditioning time setting* The timer can be set so that the preconditioning is finished at a predetermined time.

The timer can handle up to 8 different settings for:

A time on a single date

A time on one or more days of the week, with or without repetition.

Related information Preconditioning* (p. 225)

Adding and editing time setting for precondi- tioning* (p. 226)

Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning* (p. 228)

Removing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 228)

Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* The timer for preconditioning can manage up to 8 time settings.

Adding a time setting

The button to add a time setting in the Parking climate tab in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Select the Parking climate tab.

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory. 227

3. Press Add timer.

> A pop-up window is shown.

NOTE

It is not possible to add a time setting if there already are 8 settings entered for the timer. Delete a time setting in order to be able to add a new one.

4. Tap on Date to set the time for a single date.

Tap on Days to set the time for one or more days of the week.

With Days: Activate/deactivate repetition by ticking/unticking the box for Repeat weekly.

5. With Date: Select the date for precondition- ing by scrolling the date list with the arrows.

With Days: Select the days of the week for preconditioning by tapping on the buttons for the days of the week.

6. Set the time when the preconditioning should be finished by scrolling with the arrows.

7. Tap on Confirm in order to add the time set- ting.

> The time setting is added to the list and is activated.

WARNING

Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip- ped with a heater*:

In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts.

In locations with combustible or flamma- ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.

When there is a risk that the heaters exhaust line may be blocked. For exam- ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand wheel housing can obstruct the heaters ventilation.

Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance.

Editing a time setting 1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Select the Parking climate tab.

3. Press the time setting that is to be changed.

> A pop-up window is shown.

4. Edit the time setting in the same way as described in «Adding a time setting» above.

Related information Preconditioning* (p. 225)

Preconditioning time setting* (p. 226)

Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning* (p. 228)

Removing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 228)

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.228

Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning* A time setting in the timer for preconditioning can be activated or deactivated based on need.

The timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in the cli- mate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Select the Parking climate tab.

3. Activate/deactivate a time setting by tapping on the timer button to the right of the setting.

> The time setting is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes.

WARNING

Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip- ped with a heater*:

In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts.

In locations with combustible or flamma- ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.

When there is a risk that the heaters exhaust line may be blocked. For exam- ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand wheel housing can obstruct the heaters ventilation.

Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance.

Related information Preconditioning* (p. 225)

Preconditioning time setting* (p. 226)

Adding and editing time setting for precondi- tioning* (p. 226)

Removing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 228)

Removing time setting for preconditioning* A time setting for preconditioning that is no longer required can be deleted.

The button for editing the list/deleting the time setting in the tab Parking climate in the climate view.

1. Open the climate view in the centre display.

2. Select the Parking climate tab.

3. Press Edit list.

4. Press the delete icon to the right in the list.

> The icon changes to the text Delete.

5. Press Delete to confirm.

> The time setting is removed from the list.

Related information Preconditioning* (p. 225)

Preconditioning time setting* (p. 226)

CLIMATE

}}

* Option/accessory. 229

Adding and editing time setting for precondi- tioning* (p. 226)

Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning* (p. 228)

Climate comfort when parking* The climate in the car’s passenger compartment can be maintained while the car is parked, e.g. if the engine needs to be switched off but the driver or passenger(s) wants to remain in the car and maintain the level of climate comfort.

Starting climate comfort retention is only possible via direct start.

The function utilises several systems in different cases:

Residual heat from the engine, in a cold cli- mate, heats the passenger compartment to comfort temperature.

When it is warm, the ventilation cools the passenger compartment by blowing in air from outside the car.

NOTE

Climate comfort retention is switched off when the car is locked from the outside to avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use of the function is intended to maintain climate comfort when driver or passengers remain inside the car.

Related information Parking climate* (p. 224)

Starting and switching off climate comfort when parking* (p. 229)

Starting and switching off climate comfort when parking* Climate comfort retention maintains the climate in the passenger compartment after driving. The function can use direct start from the centre dis- play.

1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the cli- mate row.

2. Select the Parking climate tab.

3. Press Keep climate comfort.

> Climate comfort retention is started/ switched off and the button illuminates/ extinguishes.

NOTE

It is not possible to start climate comfort retention if there is not enough residual heat in the engine to maintain the passenger com- partment climate, or if the outside tempera- ture is above approx. 20C (68F).

||

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.230

NOTE

Climate comfort retention is switched off when the car is locked from the outside to avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use of the function is intended to maintain climate comfort when driver or passengers remain inside the car.

Related information Climate comfort when parking* (p. 229)

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory. 231

Symbols and messages for parking climate control* A number of symbols and messages regarding parking climate control can be shown in the driver display.

Messages relating to parking climate control can also be displayed in a device which has the Volvo On Call* app.

This symbol illuminates in the driver display when the parking heater is active.

Symbol Message Specification

Parking climate

Service required

Parking climate control is disengaged. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible.

Parking climate

Temporarily unavailable

Parking climate control is temporarily disengaged. If the problem persists for some time, contact a work- shopA to check the function.

Parking climate

Unavailable Fuel level too low

Parking climate control cannot be activated when the fuel level is too low to start the parking heater*. Fill the vehicle’s fuel tank.

Parking climate

Unavailable Charge level too low

Parking climate control cannot be activated if the charge level of the starter battery is too low to start the parking heater*. Start the car.

Parking climate

Limited Charge level too low

The running time for parking climate control is limited when the state of charge in the starter battery is low. Start the car.

A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

Related information Parking climate* (p. 224)

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.232

Heater* The heater has two subfunctions that help to heat the passenger compartment or engine in different situations.

The heater has two subfunctions:

Parking heater — heats the passenger com- partment, if necessary, when the parking cli- mate control’s preconditioning is activated.

Additional heater — heats the passenger compartment and engine, if necessary, dur- ing driving.

The heater is fuel-driven and is fitted in the front right-hand wheel housing.

NOTE

When the heater is running, smoke may be emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous- ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is per- fectly normal.

Battery and charging The heater is powered by the car’s starter battery. If the charge level of the starter battery is too low, then the heater is switched off automatically and the driver display shows a message.

NOTE

Make sure that there is enough charge in the battery if the heater needs to be used.

Fuel and refuelling

Warning label on fuel filler flap.

The heater uses fuel from the car’s normal fuel tank.

If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the heater.

If the level in the fuel tank is too low then the heater is switched off automatically and the driver display shows a message.

NOTE

Make sure there is enough fuel in the car’s fuel tank if the heater needs to be used.

WARNING

Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.

Check in the driver display that the heater is switched off. This symbol is lit when it is working as a parking heater.

Related information Climate (p. 198)

Parking heater* (p. 233)

Additional heater* (p. 234)

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory. 233

Parking heater* The parking heater heats the passenger com- partment as necessary before driving if the car’s preconditioning is activated.

The parking heater is one of two subfunctions of the car’s heater. The heater is fitted in the front right-hand wheel housing.

When this symbol illuminates in the driver display, the parking heater may be active.

NOTE

When the heater is running, smoke may be emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous- ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is per- fectly normal.

The parking heater starts automatically if the parking climate’s preconditioning* is activated and the passenger compartment needs to be heated up.

It switches off automatically when a set timer time or the heater’s maximum run time expires, or if the car is restarted.

The heater’s maximum running time is 30 minutes.

NOTE

Make sure there is enough fuel in the car’s fuel tank if the parking heater needs to be used.

Make sure that there is enough charge in the starter battery if the parking heater needs to be used.

IMPORTANT

Repeated use of the parking heater combined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting.

If the heater is used on a regular basis, then the car should be driven for the same amount of time that the heater is used in order to ensure that the car’s battery is recharged with the same amount of energy as consumed by the parking heater.

WARNING

Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip- ped with a heater*:

In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts.

In locations with combustible or flamma- ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite.

When there is a risk that the heaters exhaust line may be blocked. For exam- ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand wheel housing can obstruct the heaters ventilation.

Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance.

WARNING

If there is a smell of fuel, unusual amounts of smoke, black smoke, or unusual sounds com- ing from the parking heater, switch off the heater and, if possible, pull out its fuse. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo work- shop should be contacted for repair.

Related information Heater* (p. 232)

Additional heater* (p. 234)

CLIMATE

* Option/accessory.234

Additional heater* The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger compartment and engine while driving.

The additional heater is one of two subfunctions of the car’s heater. The heater is fitted in the front right-hand wheel housing.

NOTE

When the heater is running, smoke may be emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous- ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is per- fectly normal.

The additional heater starts and is controlled automatically when heating is required while the car is being driven.

It switches off automatically when the car is switched off.

NOTE

Make sure there is enough fuel in the car’s fuel tank if the auxiliary heater needs to be used.

Related information Heater* (p. 232)

Parking heater* (p. 233)

Activating and deactivating automatic start of auxiliary heater* (p. 234)

Activating and deactivating automatic start of auxiliary heater* The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger compartment and engine while driving.

It is possible to set whether automatic start for the additional heater should be activated/deacti- vated.

1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display.

2. Press Climate.

3. Select Additional Heater to activate/deac- tivate automatic start of the additional heater.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that the automatic start for the additional heater should be switched off for short driving distances.

Related information Additional heater* (p. 234)

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.236

Lock confirmation The car indicates with hazard warning flashers when the car is locked or unlocked.

Exterior indication Locking

The car’s hazard warning flashers indicate locking by flashing and retracting the door mirrors1.

Unlocking

The car’s hazard warning flashers indicate unlocking by two flashes and extending the door mirrors1.

All doors, the tailgate and the bonnet must be closed for the car to indicate that it is locked. If locking takes place with just the driver door closed2, locking will take place but the lock indi- cation with hazard warning flashers will only take place when all doors, the tailgate and the bonnet have been closed.

Lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel

The lock and alarm indicator shows the status of the locking system:

A long flash indicates locking.

Short flashes indicate that the car is locked.

Rapid flashes after disarming the alarm* indi- cate that the alarm has been triggered.

Indication in lock buttons

Front door

Lock buttons with indicator lamp in the front door.

An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button of either front door indicates that all doors are locked. If any door is opened, the lamp will extin- guish in both doors.

1 Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors. 2 Not applicable to with cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 237

Rear door*

Lock button with indicator lamp in the rear door.

An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button for one of the doors indicates that the door in question is locked. If any door is unlocked, its lamp will extinguish while the others will continue to illuminate.

Other indication The home safe lighting and approach light func- tions can also be activated when locking and unlocking.

Related information Lock indication setting (p. 237)

Approach light duration (p. 157)

Using home safe lighting (p. 157)

Lock indication setting It is possible to select various options for how the car confirms locking and unlocking in the settings menu in the centre display.

To change the locking response setting:

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display’s top view.

2. Press My Car Locking.

3. Press Visible Locking Feedback to select when the car is to give a visible response:

Lock

Unlock

Both

Or switch off the function by selecting Off .

To change the setting for retractable rearview mirrors* when locking:

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display’s top view.

2. Press My Car Mirrors and Convenience.

3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to acti- vate or deactivate the function.

Related information Lock confirmation (p. 236)

Remote control key The remote control key locks and unlocks the doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap. The remote control key needs to be inside the car for it to be started.

Remote control key3 or key tag (Key Tag)*.

The remote control key is not physically used when starting since the car is equipped with sup- port for keyless starting (Passive Start) as stand- ard. You simply need to have the key in the front part of the passenger compartment.

For cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry)* the key can be any- where in the car to start the car. In this case, a slightly smaller, lighter key tag (Key Tag) is also supplied.

3 The figure is schematic — parts may vary depending on car model.

||

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.238

The remote control keys can be linked to differ- ent driver profiles to save personal preferences in the car.

Remote control key buttons

The remote control key has four buttons — one on the left-hand side and three on the right-hand side.

Locking — Pressing the button locks the doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and also arms the alarm*.

Press and hold to close all of the windows and the panorama roof* simultaneously.

Unlocking Pressing the button unlocks the doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and also deactivates the alarm.

A longer press opens all windows simultane- ously. This total airing function can be used, for example, to quickly air the car in hot weather.

Tailgate — Unlocks the tailgate only and disarms its alarm. On cars with power oper- ated tailgate*, the tailgate is opened auto- matically when the button is held depressed. The tailgate is also closed with a long press acoustic warning signals sound.

Panic function Used to attract attention in an emergency. Press and hold the button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate the direction indicators and the horn. The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the func- tion switches off automatically after 3 minutes.

WARNING

If anyone is left in the car, make sure the power windows and panoramic roof* are de- energised by always taking the remote control key with you when you leave the car.

NOTE

Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car.

A remote control key or key tag left in the car will be deactivated when the car is locked and the alarm is armed using another valid key. The «Double lock» function is also deactivated. The key left behind is reactivated when the car is unlocked.

A Red Key left in the car will be deacti- vated even when the car is locked using Volvo On Call, and reactivated when the car is unlocked using Volvo On Call or with another valid key.

Button-less key (Key Tag)* The key tag provided with the keyless locking and unlocking function works in the same way as the standard remote control key as regards keyless starting and locking and unlocking. The key is waterproof to a depth of approx. 10 metres (30 feet) for up to 60 minutes. It has no detachable key blade and the battery cannot be replaced.

Red Key — restricted remote control key* A Red Key is a key that makes it possible to set restrictions for some of the car’s properties, e.g. the car’s maximum speed and the loudspeaker system’s maximum volume. A key for any car

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 239

owner who wants their car to be driven responsi- bly even when someone else is driving it.

Interference Remote control key functions for keyless starting and keyless locking and unlocking* can be dis- rupted by electromagnetic fields and screening.

NOTE

Avoid storing the remote control key close to metal objects or electronic apparatus, e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers — preferably no closer than 10-15 cm (4-6 inches).

If there is still interference — use the remote con- trol key’s detachable key blade to unlock and then place the key in the backup reader in the cup holder to disarm the car.

NOTE

When the remote control key is placed in the cup holder, make sure that no other car keys, metal objects or electronic apparatus (e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers) are in the cup holder. Several car keys close to each other in the cup holder can cause interference with each other.

Related information Locking and unlocking with the remote con-

trol key (p. 239)

Remote control key range (p. 241)

Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 242)

Detachable key blade (p. 247)

Immobiliser (p. 250)

Linking remote control key to driver profile (p. 132)

Locking and unlocking with the remote control key The buttons on the remote control key can be used to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate and the fuel filler flap simultaneously.

Locking with the remote control key

The figure is schematic — parts may vary depending on car model.

Press the remote control key button to lock the car.

For the lock sequence to be activated, the driver door must be closed4. If any of the other doors or the tailgate are open, these are locked and alarmed* only when they are closed. The alarm’s movement detectors* are activated when all the doors and the tailgate are closed and locked.

4 If the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking* then all side doors must be closed.

||

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.240

NOTE

Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car.

A remote control key or key tag left in the car will be deactivated when the car is locked and the alarm is armed using another valid key. The «Double lock» function is also deactivated. The key left behind is reactivated when the car is unlocked.

A Red Key left in the car will be deacti- vated even when the car is locked using Volvo On Call, and reactivated when the car is unlocked using Volvo On Call or with another valid key.

Locking when the tailgate is open

NOTE

If the car has been locked while the tailgate is open, be careful not to leave the remote con- trol key in the cargo area when the tailgate is closed and the car is completely locked5.

Unlocking with the remote control key Press the remote control key button to

unlock the car.

Automatic relocking

If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes of unlocking, they are locked automatically. This function prevents the car from being left unlocked unintentionally.

When the remote control key does not work

NOTE

Always try moving closer to the car and mak- ing another unlock attempt.

If it is not possible to lock or unlock with the remote control key, the battery may be dis- charged — in which case, lock or unlock the driv- er’s door with the detachable key blade.

Related information Settings for remotely controlled and inside

unlocking (p. 240)

Unlocking the tailgate with the remote con- trol key (p. 241)

Remote control key (p. 237)

Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 242)

Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade (p. 249)

Settings for remotely controlled and inside unlocking It is possible to select different sequences for remotely controlled unlocking.

To change setting:

1. Tap on Settings in the centre display’s top view.

2. Press My Car Locking Remote and Interior Unlock.

3. Select option:

All Doors — unlocks all doors simultane- ously.

Single Door — unlocks the driver’s door. Unlocking all of the doors requires two presses on the remote control key’s unlock button.

The settings made here also affect central unlocking via opening handles from the inside.

Related information Locking and unlocking with the remote con-

trol key (p. 239)

Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 264)

5 If the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking and the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.*

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 241

Unlocking the tailgate with the remote control key It is possible to unlock just the tailgate by press- ing a button on the remote control key.

1. Press the remote control key’s button.

> The tailgate is unlocked but remains closed.

The side doors are still locked and the alarm is armed*. The lock and alarm indi- cator on the instrument panel extin- guishes in order to show that the entire car is not locked.

Lightly grasp the rubberised pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to open the tailgate. If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.

2. With the power operated tailgate option* —

Long press (approx. 1.5 seconds) on the

remote control key’s button

> The tailgate is unlocked and opened, while the side doors remain locked and their alarm functions armed.

Related information Locking and unlocking with the remote con-

trol key (p. 239)

Opening and closing the power*-operated tailgate (p. 268)

Remote control key range In order for the remote control key to work prop- erly it needs to be within a certain distance from the car.

For manual use The remote control key’s functions for e.g. lock- ing/unlocking that are activated by pressing on

or have a range that extends approx. 20 metres (65 feet) from the car.

If the car does not verify a button being pressed — move closer and try again.

For keyless* use

The marked area in the illustration shows areas covered by the system’s antennas.

For keyless use, a remote control key or the but- ton-less key (Key Tag) must be within a semicir- cular area with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres

||

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.242

(5 feet) on both long sides and approx. 1 metre (3 feet) from the tailgate.

NOTE

The remote control key functions may be dis- rupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc. The car can always be locked/unlocked with the key blade.

If the remote control key is removed from the car

If the remote control key is removed from the car when the engine is run- ning, the warning message Car key not found Removed from car is

shown in the driver display and an acoustic reminder sounds when the last door is closed.

The message extinguishes when the key is returned to the car, followed by a press of the right-hand keypad’s O button, or when the last door is closed.

Related information Remote control key (p. 237)

Antenna locations for the start and lock sys- tems (p. 263)

Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 260)

Replacing the battery in the remote control key The battery in the remote control key needs to be replaced when it has become discharged.

NOTE

All batteries have a limited service life and must eventually be replaced (does not apply to Key Tag). The service life of the battery var- ies depending on how often the vehicle/key is used.

The battery for the remote control key should be replaced if

the information symbol illuminates and the message Car key battery low is shown in the driver display

the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within 20 metres (65 feet) of the car.

NOTE

Always try moving closer to the car and mak- ing another unlock attempt.

The battery in the button-less key6 (Key Tag) cannot be replaced — a new key can be ordered from an authorised Volvo workshop.

IMPORTANT

A discharged Key Tag must be handed over to an authorised Volvo workshop. The key must be deleted from the car since it is still possible to use it to start the car via back-up start.

6 Supplied with cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

243

Opening the key and changing the battery

Hold the remote control key with the front visible and the Volvo logo facing the right way — slide the button at bottom edge by the key ring to the right. Slide the front side’s shell a few millimetres upwards.

The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key.

Turn the key, move the button to the side and slide the back shell a few millimetres upwards.

The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key.

Use a screwdriver or similar to turn the bat- tery cover anticlockwise until the markings meet at the OPEN text.

Carefully lift away the battery cover by press- ing e.g. a fingernail into the recess.

Then prize the battery cover upwards.

||

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

244

The battery (+) side is facing upwards. Then carefully prize loose the battery as illustrated.

IMPORTANT

Avoid touching new batteries and their con- tact surfaces with your fingers as this may impair their function.

Install a new battery with the (+) side up. Avoid touching the remote control key’s bat- tery contacts with your fingers.

Place the battery in the holder with the edge down. Then slide the battery forwards so that it fastens under the two plastic catches.

Press the battery down so that it fastens under the upper black plastic catch.

NOTE

Use batteries with the designation CR2032, 3 V.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that the batteries to be used in the remote control key fulfil UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub- section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop fulfil the above criteria.

Refit the battery cover and turn it clockwise until the marking aligns with the CLOSE text.

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory. 245

Reposition the rear side’s shell and press it down until a clicking sound can be heard.

Then slide the shell back.

> A further click will indicate that the shell is properly positioned and securely attached.

Turn the remote control key over and refit the front side’s shell by pressing it down until a clicking sound can be heard.

Then slide the shell back.

> A further click will indicate that the shell is securely attached.

IMPORTANT

Make sure that exhausted batteries are dis- posed of in a manner which is kind to the environment.

Related information Remote control key (p. 237)

Ordering more remote control keys The car is supplied with two remote control keys. A button-less key is supplied if the car is equip- ped with keyless locking and unlocking*. Addi- tional keys can be ordered.

A total of twelve keys can be programmed and used for one single car. If additional keys are ordered, additional driver profiles are added — one per new remote control key. This also applies for the key tag.

Loss of a remote control key If you lose a remote control key then a new one can be ordered at a workshop — an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The remaining remote control keys must be taken to the work- shop. The code of the missing key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention measure.

The current number of keys registered to the car can be checked via driver profiles in the centre

display’s top view, select Settings System Driver Profiles.

Related information Remote control key (p. 237)

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

* Option/accessory.246

Red Key — restricted remote control key* A Red Key makes it possible for the car’s owner to set limitations for certain of the car’s proper- ties. The limitations are intended to encourage the car to be driven in a safe manner, e.g. when being loaned out.

For a Red Key, it is possible to define the car’s maximum speed, set speed reminders and deter- mine the loudspeaker system’s maximum volume. In addition, some of the car’s driver support sys- tems will always be active. Other functions of the key are the same as those of a normal remote control key.

The restrictions are intended to act as measures to reduce the risk of accidents, thereby making it feel safer to hand over the car to e.g. young dri- vers, valet parking or a workshop.

Driver profile for Red Key A Red Key is connected to a special Red Key driver profile, and when it is active, the key’s set- tings cannot be changed. It is not possible to change to another driver profile either; this requires a normal remote control key.

The Red Key driver profile is activated when the car is unlocked with a Red Key without a normal remote control key in the vicinity.

NOTE

In the event of a change of driver, the car must be locked and unlocked in order to acti- vate a new driver profile.

Ordering Red Key One or more Red Key can be ordered from a Volvo dealer. A total of eleven keys with restric- tions can be programmed and used for a single car — at least one must be a normal remote con- trol key.

Related information Settings for Red Key* (p. 246)

Remote control key (p. 237)

Settings for Red Key* The holder of a regular remote control key can change settings for a Red Key. However, certain driver support functions are always active.

To change setting:

1. Unlock the car with the normal remote con- trol key.

2. Tap on Settings in the centre display’s top view.

3. Press System Driver Profiles Red Key.

> The following settings can be defined:

Set Time Gap For Adaptive Cruise Control*

Reduced Maximum Volume

Max Speed Limit

Speed Limit Warning

Details and settings on first use

Set Time Gap For Adaptive Cruise Control Set the time gap (1 is the shortest and 5 is the longest gap).

On first use, the setting is 5.0.

Reduced Maximum Volume Lower maximum volume for media sources.

On first use, the function is «On».

KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM

}}

* Option/accessory. 247

Max Speed Limit Set a maximum speed for this key.

On first use, the function is «On» and the speed is 120 km/h (75 mph).

Setting interval: 50-250 km/h (30-160 mph)

Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)

Speed restriction symbol.

Speed Limit Warning Warns when car moves above set values.

On first use, the function is «On» and the values are 50, 70 and 90 km/h (30, 45 and 55 mph).

Setting interval: 0-250 km/h (0-160 mph)

Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)

Max. number of simultaneous reminders: 6

Driver support functions The following driver support functions will always be active for the user of a Red Key:

Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*